You are on page 1of 405

CHAPTER 1

1.0 INTRODUCTION

1.1 Relevance of work

Ethylene is one of the most important and largest volume petrochemicals in the world

today. It is used extensively as a chemical building block for the petrochemical industry.

The importance of ethylene results from the double bond in its molecular structure that

makes it reactive. Ethylene can be converted industrially into a variety of intermediate and

end products [41]. The major use of ethylene is conversion to low and high-density

polyethylene. Other significant uses of ethylene include chlorination to ethylene dichloride,

used in the manufacture of the polyvinyl chloride (PVC), oxidation to the ethylene oxide,

an intermediate in the manufacture of polyester fibres and films, and the conversion to ethyl

benzene, an intermediate in the manufacture of polystyrene [23].

Ethylene has become an important industrial intermediate and various technologies have

been utilized in ethylene production. Recently, ethylene has taken the place of acetylene in

virtually all large-scale chemical synthesis. However, acetylene itself is a by-product of

modern ethylene production [50].

More than 97% of ethylene around the world is produced by pyrolysis of hydrocarbons,

which is the thermal cracking of petrochemicals in the presence of steam. This process can

be described as the heating of a mixture of steam and hydrocarbon to the necessary

cracking temperature depending on the hydrocarbon used. This mixture is then fed to a

fired reactor or furnace and heated. As a result, the original saturated hydrocarbon “cracks”

into smaller unsaturated molecules. This process is extremely endothermic, and the product

1
must be cooled back to the original feed temperature upon leaving the reactor in order to

minimize secondary reactions. [2]

Chemical companies have a variety of options for feedstock as well as processes to produce

ethylene. Economics and environmental issues are the dominant factors considered in the

choice of feedstock and processes of ethylene production.

The focus in this report will be on the steam pyrolysis of hydrocarbons mainly ethane.

There are several reasons for this choice which include the cost of production, availability

of raw materials and the viability of process.

1.2 Objectives

The main objective of this project is to develop a simplified plant design for the production

of ethylene and acetylene which includes a thermal cracking section, quenching section, gas

compression/separation, ethylene purification, and an integrated refrigeration section.

The design is aimed at estimating the production of ethylene and acetylene using ethane as

a feedstock and also to determine the yield of ethylene and acetylene using the steam

pyrolysis process. The design is also aimed at determining the feasibility of the steam

pyrolysis process on an industrial scale.

2
CHAPTER 2

2.0 LITERATURE REVIEW

2.1 Chemistry of ethylene and acetylene

2.1.1 Ethylene

Ethylene (IUPAC name: ethene) is a gaseous organic compound with the formula C2H4. It

is the simplest alkene (older name: olefin from its oil-forming property). Ethylene has four

hydrogen atoms bound to a pair of carbon atoms that are connected by a double bond and

hence is classified as an unsaturated hydrocarbon. All six atoms that comprise ethylene are

coplanar. The H-C-H angle is 119°, close to the 120° for ideal sp² hybridized carbon. The

molecule is also relatively rigid: rotation about the C-C bond is a high energy process that

requires breaking the π-bond. The π-bond in the ethylene molecule is responsible for its

useful reactivity. [12]

Ethylene has a boiling point temperature of -103.7°C, a melting point temperature of -

169.2°C, and a flash point temperature of -136.1°C. Physical properties of ethylene include:

 It is colourless

 It is flammable

 It has a slightly sweet smell at normal condition, that is ambient temperature and

one atmosphere

2.1.2 Acetylene

Acetylene (IUPAC name: ethyne) with the chemical symbol C2H2 is a hydrocarbon

consisting of two hydrogen atoms and two carbon atoms. As an alkyne, acetylene

is unsaturated because its two carbon atoms are bonded together in a triple bond. The

3
carbon-carbon triple bond places all four atoms in the same straight line, with CCH bond

angles of 180°. [16]

Acetylene is an extremely reactive hydrocarbon. It is moderately soluble in water or alcohol

and markedly soluble in acetone. Acetylene has a melting point temperature of -81.5°C and

a boiling point temperature of -84°C. Physical properties include:

 It is a combustible gas

 It has a distinctive odour

 Acetylene is colourless

Once the gas is compressed, liquefied, mixed or heated with air, it becomes very explosive.

2.1.3 Uses of ethylene and acetylene

The major use of ethylene is conversion to low and high-density polyethylenes, which are

used in such applications such as construction, communications, packaging, and

manufacturing of industrial and domestic products.

Other significant uses of ethylene include chlorination to ethylene dichloride, used in the

manufacture of the polyvinyl chloride (PVC), oxidation to the ethylene oxide, an

intermediate in the manufacture of polyester fibers and films, and the conversion to

ethylbenzene, an intermediate in the manufacture of polystyrene [16]. In addition, ethylene

is also a major raw material to produce plastics, textiles, paper, solvents, dyes, food

additives, pesticides, and pharmaceuticals. [12]

Acetylene is used for the production of oxy-acetylene flame. The temperature of the flame

is above 3000oC. It is employed for cutting and welding of metals. Another common use of

acetylene is as a raw material for the production of various organic chemicals including

4
1,4-butanediol, which is widely used in the preparation of polyurethane and polyester

plastics. Acetylene is also used for artificial ripening of fruits.

2.2 Chemistry of the Ethylene Process

Ethylene, because of its double bond, is a highly reactive compound, which is converted to

multi-intermediates and end-products on a large scale industrially. The thermal cracking

process is the most interesting process to produce ethylene commercially. In general the

starting raw material for ethylene production by thermal cracking can be any kind of

hydrocarbon. In reality, the choice of starting material is narrowed by economical

considerations. [26]

As the molecular weight of the feedstock increases, the product complexity increases.

Because many reactions occur during thermal cracking, it is complicated to determine the

rate of the cracking and predict the distribution of the products. Yet, investigations have

confirmed that the primary reaction, which splits the original hydrocarbon, is unimolecular

and that conversion rates follow the first order kinetics for a wide range of molecular

weight and up to high conversion of the original reactant, if there is no distinct equilibrium

barrier [17].

2.3 Market survey

2.3.1 Global market

In the past ten years, ethylene demand and price have fluctuated based upon the economical

growth in the United Stated and the rest of the industrial world. [7]

Although many economic uncertainties surround the petrochemical industry, ethylene

production and consumption should grow because of continuing replacement of natural and

5
inorganic materials with organic synthetics and the further development of radically new

synthesis materials [26].

Our target market is producers of polyethylene products, PVC, and the likes. Some of the

current global market prices of ethylene are as follows: $900/tonne in Asia, €970/tonne and

€840/tonne in Europe. [9]

2.3.2 Local market

A research on the local market for ethylene did not produce significant values. However

there are industries in Ghana which can use ethylene and acetylene as raw materials or

intermediates. Our target market is the food industries, plastics industries, paints, ripening

of fruits, packaging, and for use in welding. Examples of such industries are Qualiplast,

Duraplast, Interplast, Blue Skies Ghana, and Ezzy Paints.

2.4 Feedstock

A variety of feedstock can be used in a steam pyrolysis process. The feedstock for an

ethylene plant could be methane, ethane, propane and heavier paraffin. With the

development of cracking technology, it can also be cracked from crude oil fractions:

naphtha, kerosene and gas oil. Sometimes, raffinates from aromatics extraction facilities

can also be used as feedstock. The choice of feedstock is a compromise of availability,

price and yield. In selecting a process for ethylene production, the most important factor is

the hydrocarbon feedstock. Although this is controlled by conditions like quantity, quality,

and economics, studies have shown that as the molecular weight of the feed hydrocarbon

increases, ethylene yield decreases.

2.4.1 Methane (CH4)

6
Methane is the first member of the alkane series and is the main component of natural gas.

It is also a by-product in all gas streams from processing crude oils. It is a colourless,

odourless gas that is lighter than air. Methane is mainly used as a clean fuel gas. It is also

an important source for carbon black. Methane may be liquefied under very high pressures

and low temperatures. Liquefaction of natural gas (methane), allows its transportation to

long distances through cryogenic tankers. [17]. Methane, though an important and abundant

fuel, has not been an attractive raw material for ethylene production, because it is thermally

stable and has no carbon-carbon bonds. The carbon-hydrogen bond requires more energy to

break than the carbon-carbon bond. The C-H bond energy is 93.3 Kcal, whereas C-C

energy bond is 71.0 Kcal [6]. The net reaction for methane dehydrogenation is

2CH4 C2H4 + 2H2 …………………………… (1)

2.4.2. Ethane (CH3-CH3)

It is the second member of the alkanes and is mainly recovered from natural gas liquids.

Ethane, like methane, is a colourless gas that is insoluble in water. After methane, ethane

has the second highest composition in natural gas. Ethane is separated most efficiently from

methane by liquefying it at cryogenic temperatures. Various refrigeration strategies exist,

but the most economical process presently in wide use employs turbo-expansion, and can

recover over 90% of the ethane in natural gas. [24] The principal use of ethane is in

chemical industry, mainly, in the production of ethylene by steam cracking. Ethane is

favoured for ethylene production because the steam cracking of ethane is fairly selective for

ethylene. Ethane may be cracked alone or as a mixture with propane. [2]

The net dehydrogenation reaction of ethane is

C2H6 C2H4 + H2 …………………………… (2)


7
2.4.3 Propane C3H8

Propane is normally a gas, but it is compressible to a liquid that is transportable.

It is derived from other petroleum products during oil or natural gas processing. Propane,

also known as liquefied petroleum gas (LPG), can be a mixture of propane with small

amounts of propylene, butane and butylenes. Propane is a by-product of natural gas and

petroleum refining. Propane is used as a feedstock for ethylene production. The production

of ethylene from propane is similar to the process of ethylene production from ethane. [2]

In the dehydrogenation of propane four initial reaction steps are conceivable when

producing ethylene and propylene; however, according to Sherwood [24, 25] and Martin

[19] the first two reactions are primary. The reactions are

C3H8 C2H4 + CH4 …………………………………. (3)

C3H8 C2H6 + H2 …………………………………... (4)

2C3H8 C2H8 + 2CH4 ………………………………. (5)

2C3H8 C2H6 + C3H6 + CH4 ……………………….. (6)

2.4.4 Naphtha

Naphtha, an important feedstock for ethylene production, is a collective of liquid

hydrocarbon intermediate oil refining products. It is a mixture of hydrocarbons in the

boiling point range of 30-200 ºC. For the naphtha cracker process, typical feedstock are

light naphthas (boiling range of 30-90 ºC), full range naphthas (30-200 ºC), and special cuts

(C6-C8 raffinates) [29]. Naphtha is obtained in petroleum refineries as one of the

intermediate products from the distillation of crude oil. The processing of light naphtha to

ethylene is similar to the ethane and propane processes.

8
2.4.5 Kerosene

This is a distillate fraction heavier than naphtha, and is normally a product from distilling

crude oils under atmospheric pressures. It may also be obtained as a product from thermal

and catalytic cracking or hydrocracking units. Kerosene is usually a clear colourless liquid

which does not stop flowing except at very low temperature (normally below -30°C).

However, kerosene containing high olefin and nitrogen contents may develop some colour

(pale yellow) after being produced. Currently, kerosene is mainly used to produce jet fuels,

after it is treated to adjust its burning quality and freezing point. Before the widespread use

of electricity, kerosene was extensively used to fuel lamps, and is still used for this purpose

in remote areas. It is also used as a fuel for heating purposes. [17]

2.4.6 Gas oil

Gas oil is a heavier petroleum fraction than kerosene. It can be obtained from the

atmospheric distillation of crude oils (atmospheric gas oil, AGO), from vacuum distillation

of topped crudes (vacuum gas oil, VGO), or from cracking and hydrocracking units.

Atmospheric gas oil has a relatively lower density and sulphur content than vacuum gas oil

produced from the same crude. The aromatic content of gas oils varies appreciably,

depending mainly on the crude type and the process to which it has been subjected. A

major use of gas oil is as a fuel for diesel engines. Another important use is as a feedstock

to cracking and hydrocracking units. Gases produced from these units are suitable sources

for light olefins and LPG. [17]

2.4.7 Natural Gas

As a feedstock, natural gas yields ethylene from its ethane or propane content and forms the

basis of a massive chemical industry. Large reserves exist in many regions of the world.

9
Much of the natural gas appears in regions that are remote from markets or pipe lines, and it

is called “stranded” gas, which is a natural gas field that has been discovered, but remains

unusable for either physical or economic reasons. Most of this gas is flared, re-circulated

back into oil reservoirs, or not produced. In addition, natural gas has a major disadvantage

in transportation. Because of the low density of natural gas, pipeline construction is very

expensive. [2]

2.4.8 Choice of feedstock

The choice of feed stock is an important economic decision as it influences other costs as

well. For the reasons following, the choice of feedstock for our steam pyrolysis is ethane.

Subject to availability, ethane is the best feedstock, as it has higher yield and selectivity of

ethylene than heavier feed stocks and its processing is relatively simple, involving lower

capital costs. Another reason for choosing ethane as feedstock is, ethylene plants based on

light hydrocarbons are much simpler and cheaper to build and operate than plants designed

to use heavy feedstock. The plant has to employ much greater control over the composition

of the final product once the heavier feedstocks are cracked and more variety of

components comes. The choice for a particular feedstock, together with processing

conditions (heat, pressure, steam dilution rate) will determine the yield of ethylene,

propylene and other co-products in steam cracking. Manufacturing plants fed with ethane

and propane can be constructed at much lower investment costs than naphtha crackers.

Table 2.1 shows how product yield varies with feedstock type. If ethane is used as

feedstock, almost no propylene, butadiene and aromatics are formed as by-products.

Our key suppliers of ethane would include Texas Gas Service, Alliance Pipeline, BP

Amoco Co., Chevron Texaco, Duke Energy Co., and Shell Oil.

10
Table 2.1 Approximate material balance of pyrolysis with different feed stock

Products,% mass Gaseous feed Liquid feed

Ethane Propane butanes naphtha gas-oil

H2 and methane 13.0 28.0 24.0 26.0 23.0

Ethylene 80.0 45.0 37.0 30.0 25.0

Propylene 1.1 14.0 16.4 14.1 14.4

Butadiene 1.4 2.0 2.0 4.5 5.0

Butene mixture 1.6 1.0 6.4 8.0 6.0

C5+ 1.6 9.0 12.6 18.5 32.0

Ratio propylene/ethylene 0.003 0.3 0.5 0.4 0.6

Propylene content into C3 86.7 58.3 99.0 98.3 96.7

fraction

2.5 General Processes for Ethylene Production

Commercially ethylene is obtained by (1) thermal cracking of hydrocarbons such as ethane,

propane, butane, naphtha, kerosene, gas oil, crude oil, etc, (2) autothermic cracking (partial

oxidation) of the above hydrocarbons, (3) recovery from refinery off-gas, (4) recovery from

coke-oven gas, and (5) catalytic dehydration of ethyl alcohol or ethyl ether. Occasionally,

raffinates from aromatics extraction facilities are used as a supplementary raw material. Of

the five methods above, small quantities of ethylene are recovered from coke oven gas and

gases produced from crude oil directly [5] but this route to ethylene has for a variety of

technical and economic reasons, so far not gained commercial significance.

11
The first step in ethylene production is thermal cracking of the hydrocarbon feedstock.

Thermal cracking of natural gas liquids (NGL) or crude oil fractions in the presence of

steam is still the dominant method for the production of ethylene. This thermal

decomposition results from adding heat to the feed to break its chemical bonds. The steam

does not enter directly into the reaction, but it enhances the product selectivity and reduces

coking in the furnace coils. The product of this thermal cracking process is a mixture of

hydrocarbons, which extends from hydrogen and methane to gasoline and gas oil [28].

Most current ethylene processes are basically similar to each other. Ethylene plants use

similar separation units.

In the following sections, each step of ethylene production will be discussed.

2.5.1 Thermal Cracking Section

The first section of ethylene production process is thermal cracking. Thermal cracking is

the heart of an ethylene plant. This section produces all the products of the plant, while

other sections serve to separate and purify the products. Additionally, this section has the

greatest effect upon the economics of the process. Various types of pyrolysis reactors have

been proposed and commercialized for the thermal cracker. These pyrolysis reactors

include (1) direct heating (2) indirect heating (3) autothermic cracking and others.

The direct heating process using fired tubular heater is the most common cracker in an

ethylene plant. In this process a variety of the hydrocarbon feedstock can be used ranging

from ethane to gas oil. Steam is added to the hydrocarbon feed for several reasons: (1)

reduce the partial pressure of hydrocarbon, (2) lower the residence time of the hydrocarbon,

and (3) decrease the rate of coke formation within the tubes by reaction of steam with

carbon to form carbon monoxide and hydrogen.

12
Thermal cracking of hydrocarbons by indirect heating include the pebble bed reactors, the

fluidized bed reactors, and regenerative furnace. Even though construction costs seem to be

more expensive and the operation to be more complex, ethylene yield by indirect heating is

higher than that obtained in the fired tubular heaters. One of the advantages of the indirect

heating reactors is that crude oil and heavy fuel oil can be used as feedstock because the

coke by-product can be removed continuously or intermittently in the process [6].

The pyrolysis gas leaving the cracker usually has a temperature in the range of 375°C to

500°C in the case of naphtha pyrolysis and typically from 500°C to 600°C in the case of

gas oil pyrolysis. The outlet temperature depends upon the amount of the carbon deposits in

the transfer line exchanger [26]. Quenching of the conversion product or rapid temperature

reduction is important to prevent the decrease of ethylene yields caused by secondary

reactions. This is carried out either by transfer line exchangers or by injecting water and oil.

2.5.2 Gas Compression and Treatment Section

In addition to the thermal cracking section, the sections for removal of acid gases, drying of

the cracked gases, removal of acetylenic compounds, and purification of ethylene are also

very important, because an efficient ethylene plant is the result of the integration of these

process sections and because, in respect to cost, the thermal cracking section is only about

20-30% of the whole plant. In addition, the goal is to produce ethylene with high purity

above 99.9%.

Most ethylene processes call for compression of the pyrolysis gas leaving the quench tower.

Consequently, the cooled cracked gas leaving the water tower is compressed in four to five

stages. Plants based upon gaseous feedstock generally employ four stages, while many

naphtha-and gas oil-based plants employ five stages of pyrolysis gas compression. Between
13
compression stages, the cracked gas is usually cooled in water-cooled exchangers. Water

and hydrocarbons condensed between stages are separated from the pyrolysis gas in inter-

stage separators.

Hydrogen sulphide and carbon dioxide are removed from pyrolysis gas between the third

stage and fourth stage of the compression system. This location is optimum because the

actual gas volume has been reduced significantly in the first three stages of compression

while acidic components are still present in the gas stream [26]. Acid gas produced in

thermal cracking must be removed before the first major fractionation step. In removing

acid gases such as carbon dioxide and hydrogen sulphide, non-regenerative caustic washing

followed by water washing is employed in the most of the existing plants and proves to be

most economic. The pyrolysis gas leaving the caustic scrubber contains less than 1 ppm of

acid gases and hence assures that the final products of the plant will meet specification in

this respect.

Compressed cracked gas usually is dried to reduce the moisture content to 1 ppm or less

and avoid problems with freezing and hydrate formation in downstream low temperature

equipment. In drying the cracked gases, alumina, silica gel, and molecular sieves are used

commercially. Among them, molecular sieves seem to have an economic advantage over

conventional desiccants because of their higher desiccant activities and lower regeneration

temperatures [17]. Recovery of acetylene and removal of acetylenic materials from the

process gas is very important in manufacturing polymer-grade ethylene.

2.5.3 Recovery and Purification Section

After the cracked gases have been quenched, compressed, freed of the acid gases, and

dried, they generally contain hydrogen and light hydrocarbons in the C1-C6 range.

Depending upon the cracking method employed, carbon monoxide and nitrogen also may
14
be present. Low temperature straight fractionation, absorption, and selective adsorption are

three different methods to recover and purify ethylene. The aim of this section is to separate

ethylene and acetylene from hydrogen and methane fractions, ethane and propane fractions,

and heavier hydrocarbons. Commercial separation processes operate at four ranges of

pressure: 450-600 psia, 100-150 psia, 70-90 psia, and 30-40 psia. The most popular is the

450-600 psia because it offers an attractive combination of purity, recovery, efficiency, and

investment for large ethylene plants. [41]

In ethylene purification section, demethanized process streams are introduced to the de-

ethanizer in most cases. The de-ethanizer is a simple tower refrigerated by propane or

propylene to make reflux. The net overhead from the de-ethanizer flows to an ethylene-

ethane separator. This is the second most costly separation step in an ethylene plant because

the volatility is low and a large amount of reflux is required.

2.5.4 The Refrigeration Section

The separation of pyrolysis gas through condensation and fractionation at cryogenic

temperatures requires external refrigeration and is an important part of the ethylene system.

An ethylene refrigerator has two or three stages for a total of between five and seven stages

for the entire refrigeration cascade. Reflux ratios in the columns are selected carefully to

avoid large refrigeration consumption [47].

15
CHAPTER 3

3.0 PROCESS SELECTION AND DESCRIPTION

The different processes in ethylene production include steam pyrolysis, catalytic pyrolysis,

recovery from fluid catalytic cracking off gas, autothermic and fluidized-bed cracking, and

membrane reactor.

3.1 Steam pyrolysis

The most commonly used process is steam pyrolysis of hydrocarbons. The feedstock,

mixed with dilution steam, enters the cracking section and is pyrolysised by heat into small

components. The pyrolysis gas enters the quench section and is cooled there to some

controlled temperature. Water enters the water quench tower, a part of quench section,

cooling down the high temperature pyrolysis gas and becoming steam. That steam, called

dilution steam, mixes with the feedstock before entering the pyrolysis section to decrease

the partial pressure of the cracked gases and slow coke formation. Finally, the pyrolysis

gas goes into the separation section to be separated into a variety of desired final products.

[33]

Steam

CRACKING QUENCH SEPARATION Final


SECTION SECTION SECTION
Feedstock Pyrolysis product
gas

Water

Figure 3.1 A simplified ethylene plant diagram sheet. [33]

16
3.2 Catalytic pyrolysis

A catalytic pyrolysis process for production of ethylene from heavy hydrocarbons,

comprises heavy hydrocarbons that are contacted with a pillared inter layered clay

molecular sieve or other high silica zeolite containing catalysts in a riser or down flow

transfer line reactor in the presence of steam. It is catalytically pyrolysed at a temperature

of 650° C to 750° C and a pressure of 0.15 to 0.4 MPa for a contact time of 0.2 to 5

seconds. The weight ratio of catalyst to feedstock ranges from 15:1 to 40:1 and the weight

ratio of steam to feedstock is about 0.3:1 to 1:1.

Catalytic pyrolysis combines catalytic cracking and steam pyrolysis and has the advantages

of both catalytic cracking and steam pyrolysis. It can raise the yields of light olefins,

expand the flexibility of products distribution, and simultaneously lower reaction

temperature and decrease energy consumption for the whole system; so it has broad

application prospect. The raw material is usually crude oil.

Considering that the feed that is used in catalytic pyrolysis is crude oil, this process is not

exactly feasible in Ghana for the production of ethylene and acetylene. This is due to the

shortage in supply of Ghana‟s crude oil. Furthermore, the crude oil which is imported

mainly from Nigeria and Equatorial Guinea is chiefly refined to produced petroleum,

diesel, kerosene, etc. which is highly useful on the market. Furthermore, this process

requires the use of catalysts in large quantities, and which would require frequent plant shut

down in case of short catalyst life.

3.3 Autothermic and fluidized bed cracking

Most of the autothermic cracking processes produce acetylene as a main product and

ethylene as a by-product. Most of these processes operate at atmospheric pressure, and

17
hydrocarbon feedstock, air, or oxygen and fuels are preheated to about 593ºC to reduce the

oxygen consumption and increase the yield. The process of ethylene production by

autothermic cracking is based upon the thermal cracking of crude oil using fluidized beds.

[2]

Fluidized bed reactors are relatively new tools in the chemical engineering field developed

for the oil and petrochemical industries. Here catalysts are used to reduce petroleum to

simpler compounds through cracking. Today fluidized bed reactors are still used to produce

gasoline and other fuels, along with many other chemicals. Many industrially produced

polymers are made using FBR technology, such as rubber, vinyl chloride, polyethylene,

and styrene. A major advantage of this process is the ability to operate the reactor in a

continuous state. However because of the expansion of the materials in the reactor, a larger

vessel is often required, which increases the cost of production. Again, the fluid-like

behaviour of fine solid particles within the bed eventually results in the wear and tear of the

reactor vessel. This requires expensive maintenance which adds to the cost of production.

3.4 Membrane reactor

Membrane reactors may be used in either batch or continuous mode, and allow the easy

separation of the enzyme from the product. Due to the ease with which membrane reactor

systems may be established, they are often used for production on a small scale (g to kg),

especially where a multi-enzyme pathway or co-enzyme regeneration is needed.

Membrane reactors combine reaction with separation to increase conversion. One of the

products of a given reaction is removed from the reactor through the membrane, forcing the

equilibrium of the reaction "to the right" (according to Le Chatelier's Principle), so that

more of that product is produced. Membrane reactors are most commonly used when a

18
reaction involves some form of catalyst. [8] There are two main types of these membrane

reactors (1) the inert membrane reactor and (2) the catalytic membrane reactor.

The inert membrane reactor allows catalyst pellets to flow with the reactants on the feed

side (usually the inside of the membrane). In this kind of membrane reactor, the membrane

does not participate in the reaction directly; it simply acts as a barrier to the reactants and

some products. [14]

Catalytic Ceramic Membrane is a system for the dehydrogenation of ethane to produce

ethylene and hydrogen through the use of a catalytic ceramic membrane having selective

permeability, thus permitting the separation of hydrogen from the reaction zone which

causes further dehydrogenation of ethane. The catalytic ceramic membrane tube is enclosed

within an alloy tube of suitable composition to permit heating to the temperature range of

300° to 650° C. The reactor is connected to a recovery system which permits separation of

pure ethylene and unconverted ethane. A steady stream of H2O or argon continuously

sweeps away the H2 coming out through the selective membrane, thereby further

facilitating the conversion process. [14]

The membrane reactor‟s major advantage is its combination of reaction and separation to

produce a good amount of conversion and yield. However, the membranes (ceramic and

metallic) are poor in mechanical strength and need to be replaced at regular intervals.

Another major disadvantage is the cost of the membranes and its low resistance to harsh

environments. Also, the membrane reactors are usually used for production on small scale

(g to kg). [11] Considering the amount of ethylene and acetylene we want to produce,

which runs into thousands of tonnes, this process is not recommended.

19
3.5 Fluidized catalytic cracking

Fluidized catalytic cracking (FCC) is an important process in oil refineries. It upgrades

heavy hydrocarbons to lighter more valuable products by cracking, and is the major

producer of gasoline in refineries. FCC Units present challenging multivariable control

problems.

The heavy molecule cracking process occurs in a riser tubular reactor, at high temperatures,

building up fuel gas, LPG, cracked naphtha (gasoline), light cycle oil, decanted oil, and

coke. The coke deposits on the spent catalyst surface, causing its deactivation. The catalytic

activity is re-established by coke combustion in a fluidized bed reactor, dominated

regenerator. The system riser-regenerator is called the converter. Steam lifts the heated

regenerated catalyst to be combined with the oil in the riser so that the oil-catalyst mixture

rises in an ascending dispersed stream to the separator. The control valve manipulates the

quantity of hot regenerated catalyst from the standpipe to the "riser" in order to maintain a

predetermined outlet riser temperature. On the top of the separator, the catalyst particles are

separated from vapour products by cyclones. The stream transfers the reaction products

overhead to the products recovery section. The standpipe transfers spent catalyst

continuously from the separator to the regenerator by a control valve.

3.6 Choice of Process

Based on the comparisons above, steam pyrolysis shall be used in this project. Steam

pyrolysis is one of the most important processes of petrochemistry. The main advantage of

this process compared with other processes is that it is quite flexible in terms of feed stock.

In addition steam pyrolysis is the best economical solution to produce ethylene and

acetylene, because other methods are more expensive.

20
3.7 Process description (steam pyrolysis)

The fresh feed of ethane is combined with the recycled ethane from the ethylene column

and charged to the pyrolysis furnace. Dilution steam is added to ethane before it enters the

cracking furnace, to reduce the partial pressure of ethane and lower the residence time of

ethane in the high temperature zone, which decrease the rate of coke formation within the

tubes. The mixture of ethane and steam is preheated in the convection section of the

furnace, and the ethane cracks in vertical tubes within a residence time of 0.1 to 0.5 s. The

cracked gas leaves the furnace at 800 °C and 8.0×107kPa and is quickly cooled to 340 °C in

the transfer line exchangers to preserve gas composition. It generates 370°C steam at a

pressure of 16690kPa. The gas is then further quenched in quench towers by direct contact

with water where the gases leave as overhead to the compressor and the quench water is

separated and recycled.

The cracked gases are then compressed in four stages. Acid gases such as carbon dioxide,

are removed after the third stage of compression. The effluent gas leaves the compression

section at 42°C and 3500kPa from which it is dried and cooled in a series of heat

exchangers. It is then passed to a de-methanizer where methane and hydrogen is separated

as overhead. The net bottom stream of the demethanizer is charged to the de-ethanizer.

The overhead vapour from the de-ethanizer is partially condensed by heat exchange and

propylene refrigerant. The bottom stream leaving the de-ethanizer contains C3+

hydrocarbons (mostly propane) that are stored in C3+ storage tanks. The net overhead from

the de-ethanizer is the ethylene-ethane stream with traces of acetylene. This stream is then

fed to the C2–splitter to separate ethylene and acetylene from ethane. The ethane leaves as

bottoms product and is recycled back to the furnace. The overhead vapour (ethylene-

acetylene mixture) is forwarded to an acetylene absorber where acetone is used as the

21
extracting solvent. The gas is then finally sent to the ethylene column where high purity

polymer grade ethylene is recovered as product. The bottoms product containing mainly

acetylene is sent to the acetylene stripper where acetylene is recovered by further

separation.

3.8 Capacity

Our plant is likely to have a capacity of 100,000 tonnes per year of ethylene and about 550

tonnes per year of acetylene. This is because we are operating in a continuous process. Our

main product is ethylene. Acetylene is only a by-product, which is recovered in our quest to

produce 99.95% polymer-grade ethylene to meet market demands. The percentage yield for

acetylene is about 0.2% when using ethane.

22
CHAPTER 4

4.0 MATERIAL AND ENERGY BALANCES

The general material balance equation is

( Material out) = ( Material in ) + ( Material generation ) – (Material consumption )-

( Material accumulation)

Assumptions:

1. Steady state, no accumulation

2. All masses are calculated on hourly basis

The quantity of ethylene produced per annum = 13888.89kg = 100000tonnes

Plant attainment is 300 days to allow for downtime for maintenances.

The calculations that resulted in the charts shown in this chapter are represented in the

appendix A

23
4.1 SUMMARY OF MATERIAL BALANCES

4.1.1 FURNACE

Fresh ethane Flue gases


Component mass Mass, Component mass Mass,
flowrate % flowrate %
(kg/hr) (kg/hr)
Ethane 29189.55 100 CO2 44 13.3
TOTAL 29189.55 100 O2 9.6 2.9
Temperature: 70°C N2 242.2 73
H2O(v) 36 10.8
TOTAL 331.85 100
Temperature: 250°C

Material Steam 1
Component mass mass, Pyrolysis furnace
flowrate %
(kg/hr)
H2O 5259.6 100 Material stream 2
TOTAL 5259.6 100 Component mass mass (%)
Temperature: 180 °C flowrate
(kg/hr)
Methane 1062.4992 3.08
Ethane 10216.35 29.59
Propane 2643.5992 7.66
H2O 5201.3132 15.06
Fuel/air Hydrogen 1018.2284 2.95
Component mass Mass, Acetylene 82.2172 0.24
flowrate % Ethylene 14166.656 41.03
(kg/hr) CO2 139.1368 0.40
Methane 1544 5.48 TOTAL 34530.00 100.00
Air 25890.0922 94.52 Temperature: 840.8 °C
TOTAL 27390.5322 100 Pressure : 107kPa
Temperature: 25 °C
Pressure: 101.325kPa

24
4.1.2 TRANSFER LINE EXCHANGER

Material stream 2
Component mass mass (%)
flowrate Cooling water 1
(kg/hr)
Methane 1062.4992 3.08 Component Mass Mass %
Ethane 10216.35 29.59 flowrate
Propane 2643.5992 7.66 (Kg/hr)
H2O 5201.3132 15.06 H2O 10620 100
Hydrogen 1018.2284 2.95 TOTAL 10620 100
Acetylene 82.2172 0.24 Temperature: 25°C
Ethylene 14166.656 41.03 Pressure: 4177 kPa
CO2 139.1368 0.40
TOTAL 34530.00 100.00
Temperature: 840.8 °C
Pressure : 101kPa

Transfer-line exchanger

Material stream 3
Steam at 500 C
Component mass mass
Component Mass Mass % flowrate (%)
flowrate (kg/hr)
(Kg/hr) Methane 1062.4992 3.08
H2O 10620 100 Ethane 10216.35 29.59
TOTAL 10620 100 Propane 2643.5992 7.66
Temperature: 500°C H2O 5201.3132 15.06
Pressure: 16690 kPa Hydrogen 1018.2284 2.95
Acetylene 82.2172 0.24
Ethylene 14166.656 41.03
CO2 139.1368 0.40
TOTAL 34530.00 100.00
Temperature: 350 °C
Pressure : 150kPa

25
4.1.3 QUENCH TOWER

Material stream 3
Component mass mass
flowrate (%) Cooling water 2
(kg/hr) Component Mass Mass %
Methane 1062.4992 3.08 flowrate
Ethane 10216.35 29.59 (Kg/hr)
Propane 2643.5992 7.66 H2O 26864.82 1.0
H2O 5201.3132 15.06 TOTAL 26864.82 1.0
Hydrogen 1018.2284 2.95 Temperature: 30°C
Acetylene 82.2172 0.24 Pressure: 4177 kPa
Ethylene 14166.656 41.03
CO2 139.1368 0.40
TOTAL 34530.00 100.00
Temperature: 350 °C
Pressure : 150 kPa

Quench tower

Material stream 4
Water out
Component mass mass
flowrate fraction Component mass mass
(kg/hr) (%) flowrate fraction
Methane 1062.4992 3.62 (kg/hr)
H2O 141737.094 100
Ethane 10216.35 34.83
Propane 2643.5992 9.01 TOTAL 141737.094 100
H2O 5.25402 0.02 Temperature: 80 °C
Pressure : 6987 kPa
Hydrogen 1018.2284 3.47
Acetylene 82.2172 0.28
Ethylene 14166.656 48.29
CO2 139.1368 0.47
TOTAL 29333.940 100
8
Temperature: 34 °C
Pressure : 1930 kPa

26
4.1.4 CAUSTIC TOWER

Material stream 5
Component mass mass
flowrate fraction
(kg/hr) (%)
Methane 1062.4992 3.62 Caustic solution
Ethane 10216.35 34.83
Propane 2643.5992 9.01 Component Mass Mass
H2O 5.25402 0.02 flowrate fraction
(Kg/hr)
Hydrogen 1018.2284 3.47
NaOH(aq) 45068.4 100
Acetylene 82.2172 0.28
TOTAL 45068.4 100
Ethylene 14166.656 48.29
Temperature: 30°C
CO2 139.1368 0.47 Pressure: 101.325 kPa
TOTAL 29333.9408 100
Temperature: 35 °C
Pressure : 3500 kPa

Caustic tower

Material stream 6
Component mass Mass, %
Spent caustic solution flowrate
(kg/hr)
Compon Mass Mass % Methane 1062.4992 3.64
ent flowrate Ethane 10216.35 34.99
(Kg/hr) Propane 2643.5992 9.06
Na2CO3 9631.954 20 H2O 5.25402 0.02
H2O 38520.498 80
Hydrogen 1018.2284 3.49
TOTAL 48152.452 100
Temperature: 40°C Acetylene 82.2172 0.28
Pressure: 101.325 kPa Ethylene 14166.656 48.52
CO2 trace 0.00
TOTAL 29194.70971 100
Temperature: 38 °C
Pressure : 3500 kPa

27
4.1.5 SPRAY TOWER

Material stream 7
Component mass mass
flowrate (%)
(kg/hr)
Methane 1062.4992 3.64
Ethane 10216.35 34.99 Cooling water 3
Propane 2643.5992 9.06
Component mass mass %
H2O 5.25402 0.02
flowrate
Hydrogen 1018.2284 3.49 (kg/hr)
Acetylene 82.2172 0.28 H2O 87.9234 100
Ethylene 14166.656 48.52 TOTAL 87.9234 100
CO2 trace 0.00 Temperature: 21.5 °C
TOTAL 29194.70971 100 Pressure : 101 kPa
Temperature: 40 °C
Pressure : 3500 kPa

Spray tower

Water out Material stream 8

Component mass mass % Component mass mass


flowrate flowrate (%)
(kg/hr) (kg/hr)
H2O 87.9234 100 Methane 1062.4992 3.64
87.9234 100 Ethane 10216.35 34.99
TOTAL
Temperature: 80 °C Propane 2643.5992 9.06
Pressure : 101kPa Hydrogen 1018.2284 3.49
Acetylene 82.2172 0.28
Ethylene 14166.656 48.52
CO2 trace 0.00
TOTAL 29194.70971 100
Temperature: 40°C
Pressure : 3500 kPa

28
4.1.6 DEMETHANIZER

Material stream 9
Component mass mass %
flowrate Material stream 10
(kg/hr) Component mass mass
Methane 1062.4992 3.97 flowrate %
Ethane 10216.35 34.28 (kg/hr)
Propane 2643.5992 9.06 Methane 1062.4992 48
Hydrogen 1018.2284 3.60 Hydrogen 1018.2284 46
Acetylene 82.2172 0.27 Ethylene 141.29108 6
Ethylene 14166.656 49.00 TOTAL 2267.6624 100
TOTAL 28910.6902 100 Temperature: -127 °C
Temperature: -120.0 °C Pressure : 3200 kPa
Pressure : 2000 kPa

Demethanizer

Material stream 11
Component mass mass %
flowrate
(kg/hr)
Methane 11.448 0.04
Ethane 9909.4343 37.20
Propane 2621.0494 9.84
Acetylene 76.7424 0.29
Ethylene 14024.7251 52.63
TOTAL 26643.4 100
Temperature: 6.05 °C
Pressure : 2600 kPa

29
4.1.7 DE-ETHANIZER

Material stream 11
Component mass mass % Material stream 12
flowrate Component mass mass
(kg/hr) flowrate %
Methane 11.448 0.04 (kg/hr)
Ethane 9909.4343 37.20 Methane 5.048 0.02
Propane 2621.0494 9.84 Ethane 9909.435 41.4
Acetylene 76.7424 0.29 Acetylene 76.7416 0.32
Ethylene 14024.7251 52.63 Ethylene 13954.6 58.28
TOTAL 26643.4 100 TOTAL 23945.82 100
Temperature: 6.05 °C Temperature: -34.95 °C
Pressure : 3006 kPa Pressure : 3000 kPa

De-ethanizer

Propane product
Component mass mass %
flowrate
(kg/hr)
Ethylene 110.31 0.04
Propane 2623.79 0.96
TOTAL 2734.1 100
Temperature: 40.00 °C
Pressure : 3000 kPa

30
4.1.8 C2 SPLITTER

Material stream 12
Component mass Mass % Material stream 13
flowrate
(kg/hr) Component mass mass %
Methane 5.048 0.02 flowrate
Ethane 9909.435 41.4 (kg/hr)
Acetylene 76.7416 0.32 Ethylene 13919.217 0.55
Ethylene 13954.6 58.28 Acetylene 76.7416 99.45
TOTAL 23945.82 100 TOTAL 13995.96 100
Temperature: -34.95 °C Temperature: -10.7 °C
Pressure : 3080 kPa Pressure : 3200 kPa

C2 splitter

Material stream 14
Component mass mass %
flowrate
(kg/hr)
Methane 10.6528 99.53
Ethane 9909.435 0.11
Ethylene 35.385 0.36
TOTAL 9955.47 100
Temperature: -7.901 °C
Pressure : 2000kPa

31
4.1.9 ACETYLENE ABSORBER

Material stream 14
Material stream 17
Component mass mass %
Component mass mass %
flowrate
flowrate
(kg/hr)
(kg/hr)
Ethylene 13919.217 99.45
Acetone 127.201 100
Acetylene 76.7416 0.54 TOTAL 127.201 100
TOTAL 13995.96 100 Temperature: 35 °C
Temperature: -10 °C Pressure: 101.325 kPa
Pressure : 3200 kPa

Acetylene absorber

Material stream 16
Material stream 15
Component mass mass %
Component mass mass % flowrate
flowrate (kg/hr)
(kg/hr) Acetylene 75.2066 37.16
Acetylene 1.5977 0.011 Acetone 127.201 62.84
Ethylene 13900 99.98 TOTAL 202.4076 100
TOTAL 13901.535 100 Temperature: 30 °C
Temperature: 20 °C Pressure : 1000 kPa
Pressure: 1722.44kPa

32
4.1.10 ACETYLENE STRIPPER

Material stream 16
Component mass mass %
flowrate
(kg/hr)
Acetylene 75.2066 37.16
Acetone 127.201 62.84
TOTAL 202.4076 100
Temperature: 25.00 °C
Pressure : 2138 kPa

Acetylene stripper

Material stream 17 Material stream 18


Component mass mass % Component mass mass %
flowrate flowrate
(kg/hr) (kg/hr)
Acetone 127.201 100 Acetylene 79.8872 100
Acetylene Acetone
TOTAL 127.201 100 TOTAL 79.8872 100
Temperature: 31.30 °C Temperature: 34.09 °C
Pressure: 40.09 kPa Pressure : 6000 kPa

33
4.1.11 ETHYLENE COLUMN

Material stream 15
Component mass mass %
flowrate
(kg/hr)
Acetylene 1.5977 0.011
Ethylene 13900 99.98
TOTAL 13901.535 100
Temperature: 20 °C

Ethylene Column

Material stream 20 Material stream 19


Component mass mass % Component mass mass %
flowrate flowrate
(kg/hr) (kg/hr)
Ethylene 13888.89 99.9 Acetylene 1.5842 12.49
Acetylene 0.0135 0.1 Ethylene 11.1 87.51
TOTAL 13888.9 100 TOTAL 12.68 100
Temperature: -10 °C Temperature: -30 °C
Pressure: 2500 kPa Pressure : 2500 kPa

34
4.2 ENERGY BALANCES

4.2.1 FURNACE

Fresh ethane (stream 1)


Component Enthalpy
(kJ)
Ethane 2445111.3
TOTAL 2445111.3
Temperature: 70 °C

Pyrolysis furnace

Component Enthalpy
(kJ)
Steam (stream 2) Methane 3101484.4
Component enthalpy Ethane 26843935.6
(kJ) Propane 6885500.9
H2O 1551719.1 H2O 8968631.9
TOTAL 1551719 Hydrogen 11856702.8
Temperature: 180 °C Acetylene 154495.7
Ethylene 31518168.1
CO2 140909.5
TOTAL 89469828.9

35
4.2.2 QUENCH TOWER

Component Enthaply
Cooling water (stream 9)
(kJ)
Methane -196337745.9 Component Enthalpy
Ethane 82223346.4
Propane 6876775.4 H2O 187605993
H2O 1589144.4 TOTAL 187605993
Hydrogen 221078167.1 Temperature: 30°C
Acetylene 13753328.5 Pressure: 4.177 kPa
Ethylene 9533474.4
CO2 75212.34
TOTAL 138791702.6

Quench tower

Componen Enthalpy Material stream 8


t (kJ)
Methane -44726466.4 Component Enthalpy
Ethane 82218800.9
Propane 6877143 H2O 18176207.5
H2O 6977.6 TOTAL 18176207.5
Hydrogen 22107265.9 Temperature: 80 °C
Acetylene 654218 Pressure : 6987 kPa
Ethylene 96107084
CO2 4167.8
TOTAL 138791702.6

36
4.2.3 CAUSTIC TOWER

Component Enthalpy Caustic soda


(kJ)
Methane -44726466.4 Component Enthalpy (kJ)
Ethane 82218800.9
Propane 6877143 NaOH 159261400
H2O 6977.6 TOTAL 159261400
Temperature: 30°C
Hydrogen 22107265.9 Pressure: 4.177 kPa
Acetylene 654218
Ethylene 96107084
CO2 4167.8
TOTAL 138791702.6

Caustic tower

Component Enthalpy
(kJ)
Methane -350957.8
Ethane -6953247.8 Spent caustic solution
Propane 96371.2
Component Enthalpy
H2O 711.3 (kJ)
Hydrogen 20846495.5 Na2CO3(aq) 166306735.6
Acetylene -66039.6 TOTAL 166306735.6
Ethylene 597934.1 Temperature: 40°C
CO2 5414.2
TOTAL 13578747

37
4.2.4 DEMETHANIZER

Component Enthalpy
(kJ)
Methane -1058204.1
Ethane 5382174.6
Propane -863333.2
Hydrogen -6524474.9
Acetylene -5711589.7
Ethylene 8242969.9
TOTAL

Demethanizer

Component Enthalpy Component Enthalpy


(kJ) (kJ)
Methane 1094052.6 Ethane -704981.6
Hydrogen -1009895.2 Methane 420434.0
TOTAL 84157.4 Propane -130952.4
Acetylene -7726.2
Ethylene 8086124.9
TOTAL 7662898.7

38
4.2.5 DE-ETHANIZER

Component Enthalpy
(kJ)
Methane 4650.7
Ethane -706674.8
Propane -131409.9
Acetylene -6957.5
Ethylene -1145519.4
TOTAL -1985910.9

De-ethanizer

Component Enthalpy
(kJ)
Component Enthalpy
Methane 10154.4
(kJ)
Ethane -1980235.4
Propane 110680.1
Acetylene -19722.6
Ethylene 5306.8
Ethylene -3058549.5
-5048353.1 TOTAL 115986.9
TOTAL

39
4.2.6 C2 SPLITTER

Component Enthalpy
(kJ)
Methane -4909.6
Ethane -2026150.9
Acetylene 36772.2
Ethylene -2986782.9
TOTAL -4981071.2

C2 splitter

Component Enthalpy Component Enthalpy


(kJ) (kJ)
Acetylene 30135.8 Methane -2323.5
Ethylene -2318046.8 Ethane 3174817.8
TOTAL -2287911 TOTAL 3172494.3

40
4.2.7 ETHYLENE COLUMN

Component Enthalpy
(kJ)
Acetylene -36.7686
Ethylene -317733.97
TOTAL -317770.7386

Ethylene column

Component Enthalpy Component Enthalpy (kJ)


(kJ)

Ethylene -430.4059
Acetylene -155.096 Acetylene -76.4246
TOTAL -585.5019
Ethylene -2836982.474
TOTAL -2837058.903

41
CHAPTER 5

5.0 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS

Specifications for all processing equipment based on the operating conditions and flow

rates of the input and output streams among others form a major part in plant design.

The major considerations under equipment specification are:

1. Identification of the equipment

2. Function of the equipment

3. Basic design data

4. Material of construction

Information and data used are from Stanley M. Walas (1999), R K Sinnott (1999), Perry

and Green (1999). [49, 43]

5.1 Equipment list

5.1.1 Pyrolysis furnace

Duty: To crack the ethane feedstock into smaller hydrocarbons under carefully controlled

temperature to yield the optimum amount of ethylene and acetylene.

Type or description: cylindrical

Height: 15.16m

Operating temperature: 1200°C

Heat duty: 23476.165KW

Material of construction: Stainless steel (SS 310) and Refractory brick

42
5.1.2 Heat exchanger

Duty: Immediately quenches the cracked gases to a lower temperature to stop further

undesired reactions and coke formation

Type or description: Transfer-line exchanger

Temperature: 700°C

Quantity: 1

Material of construction: stainless steel

5.1.3 Quench tower

Duty: to further cool cracked gas and condense water vapour present by direct contact with

water

Type or description: packed tower

Operating temperature: 350°C to 34°C

Pressure: 150kPa

Height: 18m

Material of construction: austenitic stainless steel type 304

5.1.4 Gas compressor

Duty: increases the pressure of the gas to liquefy it for the distillation and separation

processes.

Type: centrifugal compressor

Output pressure: 3500kPa

43
Number: 4-stage

Material of construction: Carbon steel

5.1.5 Caustic tower

Duty: To remove the acid gases CO2, from the ethylene gas stream

Type: packed tower

Operating temperature: 35°C

Height of tower: 6.846m

Tower diameter: 1.9155m

Vessel volume: 19.729m3

Material of construction: carbon steel

5.1.6 Spray tower

Duty: To dry the gas stream of water (vapour) before cooling it for distillation.

Type: spray tower

Operating temperature: 42°C

Material of construction: carbon steel

5.1.7 Chilling train.

Duty: the gas is cooled and in turn is liquefied for distillation

Type: series of heat exchangers

Number: 3

Operating temperature: -120°C


44
Material of construction: stainless steel

5.1.8 De-methanizer

Duty: To separate and remove methane and hydrogen from the ethylene gas stream

Temperature: 120°C

Pressure: 30bar

Height: 15m

Diameter: 1.4m

Material of construction: carbon steel

5.1.9 De-ethanizer

Duty: To separate the C2s and C3s

Temperature: 6°C

Pressure: 32bar

Height: 25 m

Diameter: 1.5 m

Number: 1

Material of construction: carbon steel

5.1.10 C2-splitter

Duty: To separate or split the C2 into ethylene and acetylene as overhead and ethane as

bottom stream to be recycled back to the furnace.


45
Type: continuous type tray column

Operating temperature: -24.95°C

Feed pressure: 30bar

Height: 14m

Diameter: 1.7 m

Material of construction: carbon steel

5.1.11 Ethylene Column

Duty: To recover and obtain our final ethylene product.

Type: tray tower

Temperature: 20°C

Height: 78.2 m

Diameter: 3.6 m

Material of construction: stainless steel

5.1.12 Acetylene Absorber

Duty: To separate the ethylene as overhead into the ethylene still and acetylene as bottoms

to the acetylene stripper.

Type: packed tower

Temperature: 21°C

Height: 19.09m
46
Diameter: 3.248m

Material of construction: stainless steel

5.1.13 Acetylene Stripper

Duty: To strip the acetylene from the extracting solvent used in the acetylene absorption

column.

Type: packed tower

Temperature: 20°C

Material of construction: carbon steel

5.2 SPECIFICATION OF STORAGE TANKS

Tanks are typically filled to 80% of capacity to function safely. [43]

See appendix C for detailed calculations

5.2.1 Ethane storage tank

Duty: To temporarily store the ethane feedstock before cracking.

Type or description: cylindrical vertical tank on concrete support.

Capacity: 7,427,160.362gal (US)

Internal diameter of ethane storage tank =

Length of ethane storage tank = 50.1667 in = 1.274m

Thickness of tank = 25mm

Material of construction: Carbon steel


47
5.2.2 Propane storage tank

Duty: To store propane produced from the cracking process temporarily.

Description: Vertical cylindrical tank with flat base and conical roof [43]

Capacity: 3,537,431gal (US) per week

Internal diameter =

Length = 42.376in = 1.076m

Thickness of tank = 28.18mm

Material of construction: carbon steel

5.2.3 Acetylene storage tank

Duty: To temporarily store acetylene produced

Type or description: cylindrical vertical tanks with flat base on concrete foundation.

Capacity: 3,374,331.513 gal (US) per week

Internal diameter =

Length = 42.05 in =1.068 m

Thickness of tank = 25mm

Material of construction: carbon steel

5.2.4 Ethylene storage tank

Duty: To store our polymer-grade ethylene produced for 7 days.

Type or description: flat bottomed vertical cylindrical tank on concrete foundation.

Capacity: 6,361,192.115 gal (US) per week

48
Internal diameter =

Length = 48in = 1.22m

Thickness of tank = 25mm

Material of construction: Carbon steel

5.3 PIPE SPECIFICATION

The most common means of transporting fluid is the pipeline. Every pipe is a long,

cylindrical, completely enclosed conduit used to transport gas, liquid, or both from one

point to another. Sizing of pipes for fluid flow in a given plant does not only depend on the

fluid‟s physical properties, but also to some extent, on the sound economic factors. In most

engineering practices under this heading, the criterion used is the optimum diameter which

is the diameter of the pipe that gives the least total cost for annual pumping charges. The

design parameters considered are:

1) The nominal size

2) Schedule number

3) Material of construction

4) Wall thickness

1000
Approximately, Schedule number 
S

Where P = Internal pressure, psig.

S = Allowable working stress in psi.

The optimum diameter is first of all estimated based on the fluid density, capacity and

viscosity depending on the nature of the fluid.

49
According to Sinnott, the optimum diameter of a stainless steel pipe is given as:

d,optimum = 230G 0.52ρ-0.37

where, G = Mass flow rate in kg/s and ρ= density in kg/m3

5.3.1 SAMPLE CALCULATION FOR PIPE SPECIFICATION

Pipe Location: from acetylene absorber to acetylene stripper

Mass flow rate = 13574.7079 kg/hr =3.85 Kg/s

Density of gas = 1.73 kgm-3

The optimum pipe diameter for turbulent flow using stainless steel pipe is given as:

dopt = 260G0.52ρ-0.37 ……………………….. (1) [43]

Where: G = mass flow rate of feed

ρ = density of slurry

It implies, dopt = 260(3.77075)0.52(1.73) -0.37

= 428mm, 16.85 in

From the above calculation, a 428mm (16.85in) pipe diameter can be used.

4G
Reynolds number, Re  ……………………… (2) [43]
d

Where G is mass flow rate.

43.77075
Re 
 0.0010.428

50
Re = 11217

Re is greater than 4000 and hence flow is turbulent.

From Wallas (1990) Table A5

For optimum pipe diameter of 16.85 in

Nominal size = 16 in

Pipe schedule number = 30s

Outer diameter (do) = 16.00 in

Inner diameter (di) = 15.25 in

  2  
  D   0.423 m  0.1405m
2 2 2

4 4

The normal fluid velocity is given by:

………. (3) [44]

 3.77075 
u     0.471ms1
 8.2686 

Also Maximum design fluid velocity is assumed to be given by the correlation;

Maximum design fluid umax   1.2 u …….. (4) [44]


2

umax   1.22  0.471  0.67824ms1

51
5.3.1.1 Line Equivalent length

The pressure loss through the bends and check valves can be included in the line pressure-

loss calculations as an equivalent length of pipe. Assuming all the bends to be 90” elbows

of standard radius, and the isolation valves as plug-type valves.

Elbow equivalent length = 30D....................................... (9) [44]

= 30 x 0.428 m

= 12.84 m

Plug-valve equivalent length = 18D................................ (10) [44]

= 18 x0.428 m

= 7.704 m

Entry losses (at maximum design velocity) are calculated from the equation:

2
umax  0.6782 
Entry loss =   1.73   0.4 KPa
2  2 

52
Table 5.1 Summary of pipe line specifications for our ethylene plant

Nor Maxim
Locatio Optim Nomi Sched Cross- mal um
n um nal ule Material Outer Inner sectio fluid design
diamet Size(i Numb of diamete diamet nal veloc fluid
er n) er Construct r er area(i ity velocit
(mm) ion (in) (in) n2) (m/s) y (m/s)
From
Furnace Stainless
to TLE 655.53 25.83 20 steel 24 23.25 0.3375 2.297 3.3082
From
TLE to
quench Stainless
tower 423.24 16.66 40 steel 16.00 15.25 0.2277 2.713 3.906
From
quench 733.00 28.87 20 29 28.80 0.422 1.464 2.108
tower
to
compre Stainless
ssor steel
From
compre 467.6 18.40 40 18.00 17.25 0.252 2.452 3.53
ssor to
caustic Stainless
tower steel
From 737.96 29.05 20 29.20 28.70 0.425 1.453 2.094
caustic
tower Stainless
to dryer steel
From 729.29 28.65 20 28.70 28.40 0.421 1.434 2.077
dryer to Stainless
cooler steel
From 2.035
cooler 721.28 28.40 20 28.40 28.20 0.418 1.413
to de-
methani Stainless
zer steel
From
de- 696.56 27.42 30 27.45 27.00 0.403 1.353 1.95
methani
zer to
de-
ethaniz Stainless
er steel
From
de-
ethaniz
er to C2 Stainless
splitter 659 25.95 30 steel 26 25.50 0.3806 1.43 1.206

53
From
C2 495.15 19.5 30 19.5 19.25 0.193 1.89 2.73
splitter 0
to
acetyle
ne
absorbe Stainless
r steel
From
acetyle
ne 428 16.85 30 16.6 16.00 0.1405 0.471 0.678
absorbe 0
r to
acetyle
ne Stainless
stripper steel
From 491 19.33 30 19.3 19.00 0.190 0.64 0.920
acetyle 0
ne
absorbe
r to
ethylen Stainless
e still steel
From
ethylen 44.95 17.70 30 Stainless 17.7 17.00 0.0152 4.00 5.76
e still to steel 0
storage
tank

5.4 PUMP SELECTION

Centrifugal pumps will be used throughout the process. These pumps are characterised by

their specific speed which is a dimensionless variable. Different types of pumps have

different efficiency envelopes according to their specific speed. Pump selection is made

based on the flow rate and the head required, together with other process considerations,

such as corrosion or the presence of solids in the fluid. The pressure developed by a

centrifugal pumps depend on:

 Fluid density

 Diameter of the pump impeller

 The rotational speed of the impeller


54
 Volumetric flow rate through the pump

5.4.1 PUMP SPECIFICATION

Sample Calculation

Location: Between acetylene absorber and ethylene still

Volumetric flow rate = 836.934 m3s-1

From the above pipe specification,

Optimum pipe diameter = 16.66in

Nominal size = 16 in

Pipe schedule number = 30s

Outer diameter (do) = 16 in

Inner diameter (di) = 15.25 in

Velocity of fluid in the pipe = 0.678ms-1

Reynolds number of fluid = 11350

5.4.1.1 Power requirement


Total pump head, H  H dc  H sc

P V2   P V2 
H   dc  Z dc  dc    sc  Z sc  sc 
 g 2 g   g 2g 

P P V 2 V 2 
Therefore, H   dc sc  Z  dc sc 
 g 2g 

55
Where Pdc = Discharge pressure, 405 KPa

Psc = Suction pressure, 40 KPa

0.0097688
The suction velocity, Vsc   2.873ms1
0.0034

0.0001084
The discharge velocity, Vdc   3.284ms1
0.000033

P V2 
The total discharge head, H dc   dc  Z dc  dc 
 g 2g 

 Pdc Vdc2 

The total suction head, H dc    Z dc  
 g 2 g 

But the Total pump head, H  H dc  H sc

P V2   P V2 
H   dc  Z dc  dc    sc  Z sc  sc 
 g 2 g   g 2g 

P P V 2 V 2 
Therefore, H   dc sc  Z  dc sc 
 g 2g 

Where, Z  Z dc  Z sc  2m

that is the height difference at the centre line of the pump between the suction and

discharge pipe. [44]

Pdc  Psc  365KPa

Vdc  Vsc  0.411ms1

56
ρ = 790kg/m3; g = 9.81m/s2

365000 0.411
Hence, H  2  49.11m
790  9.81 2  9.81

Useful power, Puseful  gQH

Q = 0.0097688; H = 49.11m ; ρ = 790kg/m3;

g = 9.81m/s2

Hence, Puseful  790  9.81 0.00977  49.11  3718.433W

The value of specific speed represents the ratio of the pump flow rate to the head at the

speed corresponding to the maximum efficiency point. It depends primarily on the design

of the pump and impeller. The specific speed can be used to avoid cavitations or to select

the most economical pump for a given system layout.

The value of specific speed can be calculated from the relation;

N Q
Ns  3
………………………………….. (11)
4
H

Where N is in rpm (1750rev/min), Q in gpm (586.2gpm), and H in feet (15.41ft).

1750 586.2
Ns  3
 936.903
4
161.122

Specific speeds for centrifugal pumps usually lie the range 900-15000 but values above

12000rpm are considered impractical .Since the calculated value lies within the range it

suggest that the calculated value is correct.

57
5.4.1.2 Net positive suction head

NPSH is the absolute pressure at the pump inlet expressed in feet of liquid, plus velocity

head, minus the vapour pressure of the fluid at pumping temperature, and corrected to the

elevation of the pump centreline in the case of horizontal pumps or to the entrance to the

first-stage impeller for vertical. Thus if NPSH is zero or less, the liquid can vaporise. The

NPSH increases as the pump capacity increases. Hence it is important to consider the range

of flow requirement during the pump selection time.

Pi  Pvap
Net positive suction head  ………… (12)
g

Where Pi = absolute static pressure at the pump inlet, N/m2

Pvap = Vapour pressure, N/m2 = 0.1233 x 105 Pa (Rogers and Mayhew)

Pi  Patm  gH s ………………………… (13)

Patm = atmospheric pressure, N/m2

ρ = density of pulp

Hs = Suction head

Inserting values into equation (12), it implies,

279272.589  12330
Net positive suction head   34.444m
790  9.81

58
Table 5.2 Summary of pump specification

Pump location Qty Power Net positive Specific Efficiency


requirement suction head speed
(w) (m) (r/min)

From TLE to Quench 1 1637 21 293 65


Tower
For pumping caustic 1 1142.82 15.095 192 60
solution into the
caustic tower
For pumping acetone 1 3718.433 34.44 862 72
into the acetylene
absorber

59
CHAPTER 6

6.0 DESIGN OF A FURNACE

6.1 Problem statement

To design a cracking furnace to crack ethane feedstock to yield ethylene and acetylene as

products. Furnace to operate at thermal efficiency of 85 %.

Stack

Stack damper
Stea
m

Ethane feed

Convection section
sesection

Cracked gas

Radiant section

Fuel

Air

Figure 6.1 A schematic diagram of a typical industrial furnace

6.2 CHEMICAL ENGINEERING DESIGN


60
6.2.1 SCOPE OF DESIGN

 Design constraints

 Total energy absorbed

 Total Energy absorbed

 Heat flux across the cracking coils

 Heat transfer coefficient across tube

 Pressure drop across tubes

 Stack height

 Fuel and air requirement

6.2.2 Design constraints

Furnace geometry cylindrical

Tube diameter OD = 0.168275 m (6.625 in.)

Center-to-center spacing =0.3048 m (12 in.)

Tube thickness =0.00762 m (0.3 in.)

Diameter of the radiant section = 5 m

Number of tubes in the radiant section = 30

Number of tubes in the convective section = 16

Tube length = 10.7 m

61
Height of the radiant section = 11.5 m

Methane use as fuel

Excess air 10%

A single row tube alignment

6.2.3 Total energy absorbed

6.2.3.1 Reactions in the furnace:


C2H6 C2H4 + H2 Reaction 1

2C2H6 C3H8 + CH4 Reaction 2

C3H8 C2H2 + CH4 + H2 Reaction 3

C + 2H2O CO2 + 2H2 Reaction 4

Since there are a series of reaction in the furnace the four


62
Reference: CO2, C2H2, C2H4, C3H8, CH4, H2O, C2H6, H2 at 25 oC 1 atm

63
Table 6.1 Enthalpy table

Nout × 103
3
Substance Nin × 10 Hin KJ/mol Hin KJ/mol
mol/hr

CO2 - - 3.555 H3

C2H2 - - 3.199 H4

C2H4 - - 505.869 H5

C3H8 - - 60.79 H6

CH4 - - 66.477 H7

H2O 291.896 H1 291.265 H8

C2H6 972.985 H2 340.564 H9

H2 - - 509.068 H10

Estimation of the enthalpy of the inlet stream

64
Total heat absorbed = Heat for preheating the feed + Heat absorbed for cracking of feed

Assume a furnace efficiency of 85 %

Duty of the furnace is 20.862 MW

6.2.4 Energy absorbed

Assume 70 % of the total heat absorbed in used for the cracking of Feed stock the

remaining is used for preheating of the feed stock.

6.2.5 Heat flux in the radiant coils

65
π ……………………… 6.2

[2]

Where: N tube is number of tubes, Do is Outer diameter of tubes, L tube is the length of the

tube

6.2.6 Heat lost to the surroundings

The heat lost to the surroundings is in the range of 0.02 to 0.03 as a fraction of the total

released heat [Wallas, 1948].Since Q lost is an allowance and for this design we can set it to

be equal to 0.02.

6.2.7 Heat lost is the stack gas

6.2.8 TEMPERATURE PROFILE IN THE FURNACE

6.2.8.1 Temperature of the process fluid leaving the convective section


The stream entering the radiation section has absorbed 30 % of the total heat absorbed.

Qabsorbed in the convective tubes = Hout – Hin

66
Where Qabsorbed in the convective tubes = heat absorbed in the convection section (MJ/hr)

Hout = Enthalpy of the stream entering the radiant section (KJ/mol)

Hin= Enthalpy of the feedstock (KJ/mol)

Qabsorbed in the convective tubes

10−3+0.688×10−5 +0.7604×10−12 2)

T = 312 ºC

6.2.8.2 Temperature of flue gas entering the convective section


By rule of thumb the temperature of the flue gas entering the convective section should be

150 ºC above the process temperature. This mean the temperature of the gas is 990.8 ºC.

6.2.8.3 Temperature of flue gas entering the stack section


(Waals 1990,pg. 214)

Where Ts temperature of flue gas leaving the convection section oF

a = 0.22048 - 0.35027z + 0.92344z2, b = 0.016086 + 0.29393z - 048139z2

Where z = fraction excess air =0.1

Therefore substitute into the equation above: a= 0.1946874, b=0.0406653

Now solving for Ts,


67
6.2.9 STACK DESIGN

Where:

P = the suction available from a natural draft system, Pa

C = 0.0342

a = atmospheric pressure in Pa, h = height of the stack (m).,Ti=inlet temperature in K

To =ambient temperature in K (25 oC)

Setting the ∆P = the suction available from a natural draft system to 400 Pa which is in the

acceptable range [2]

=80.04 m

=80.04 m

6.2.10 PROCESS SIDE HEAT TRANSFER

6.2.10.1 Process-side heat transfer


…………………………..… ………..… 6.14 [2]

Neglecting the viscosity correction factor


68
Where Nu = Nusselt number = , Re =Reynolds number = ,

Pr =Prandtl number = , hi= inside coefficient (W/m2 oC), di= tube inside diameter (m),

ut = fluid velocity(m/s), kf = fluid thermal conductivity(W/moC), Gt = mass velocity, mass

flow per unit area(kg/m2s), µ = fluid viscosity at the bulk fluid temperature (Ns/m2),

µw= fluid viscosity at the tube wall temperature (Ns/m2),

Cp = fluid specific heat, heat capacity, J/kgoC.

6.2.10.1.1 In the convection tubes

6.2.10.1.2 For the radiative tubes

69
6.2.11 PRESSURE DROP

ρ
…………………………... 6.15 [2]

Where P = tube-side pressure drop, KPa,

Np= number of tube-side passes, Ut = tube-side velocity, m/s, L = length of one tube, m

jf = Friction factor

6.2.11.1 Pressure drop in the radiative tubes:


At Reynolds number of 5.872 , jf = 2 ×10-3 [2], µw = 0.1238×10-3, Np=30, L=11m

= 26.152 KPa

6.2.11.2 Pressure drop in the Convective tubes:


At Reynolds number of 2.446 , jf = 1.7 ×10-3 [2], µw=1.698×10-3, Np=3, L=11m

=5.743KPa

6.2.12 FUEL CONSUMPTION AND REQUIRED AIR FLOW RATE

6.2.12.1 Fuel consumption


Using methane as the fuel

Q released=W fuel LHVfuel ( Mullinger et al.2008)


70
Where Q released= total heat released MJ / hr

W fuel = Fuel flow rate (Kg/hr), LHVfuel= Low heating value of fuel (CH4) (MJ/Kg)

LHVfuel=50.055 MJ/Kg (21520 Btu/Ibm) (Waals 1990,pg. 216 )

6.2.12.2 The flow rate of air to be required:


CH4 + 2(O2 + 3.76N2) CO2 + 2H2O + 7.52N2

71
Table 6.2 chemical engineering design summary of pyrolysis furnace

DESIGN PARAMETERS VALUES UNITS

Heat Duty 20.862 MW

o
Temperature in/out 70/840.8 C

Pressure drop 5.737 KPa

Fuel consumption rate 0.417 Kg/s

Air required flow rate 7.192 Kg Air /s

Excess air required 10 %

Feedstock flow rate 3.858 Kg/s

Steam required 1.461 Kg/s

Outlet process flow rate 9.588 Kg/s

Operating pressure 107 KPa

72
6.3 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING DESIGN

6.3.1 Design Pressure

For vessels under internal pressure, the design pressure is normally 5 to 10 percent above

the normal operating pressure (Sinnott, 2005).The internal pressure in the furnace is related

to the hydrostatic head, atmospheric pressure and the pressure drop by:

Design Pressure (Pi) =hydrostatic pressure + atmospheric pressure = ρgh + (101325 - ∆P),

Pa

Where ρ = density of the flue gas =3.896 Kg/m3

g = acceleration due to gravity=9.81m/s2

h = height of furnace =15.16 m

∆P= negligible

H conv. =the height of the convective section = 3.66 m

H rad. = the height of the radiative section = 11.5 m

Design Pressure (Pi) = (3.896×9.81× (3.66+11.5) + (101325)

= 101.904 KPa

10 % of the design pressure =1.1×101.904

=112.095 KPa

73
6.3.2 Minimum Thickness of Cylindrical shell

For a cylindrical shell, the minimum thickness required to resist internal pressure is given

as:

Where Pi is the internal pressure = 112.095 N/m2

Di is the internal diameter = 6 m

F is design stress,

Typical design stress for stainless steel at 3500C is 100000 N/m2 (Sinnott, 2005).

Allowing for a corrosion allowance of 0.002m, the minimum thickness is 0.005365m.

6.3.3 Design Temperature

The design temperature at which the design stress is evaluated should be taken as the

maximum working temperature of the material (Sinnott, 2005). The design temperature is

4000C (523.15K)

6.3.4 Materials of Construction

Stainless steels are the most frequently used corrosion resistant materials in the chemical

industry. Type 304 stainless steel (the so called 18/8 stainless steel) is the most generally

used stainless steel. If the equipment is being deigned to operate at high temperatures,

materials that retain their strength must be selected. The stainless steels are superior in this

74
respect to plain carbon steel. Stainless steel is to be used for this design (Coulson et al,

Volume 6).

6.3.5 STRESS ANALYSIS

The main sources of loads to consider are:

The internal Pressure

The total longitudinal and circumferential stresses due to internal pressure are given as:

Pi Di
Longitudinal stress, L
2t

Pi Di
Circumferential stress, h
4t

112.095  6.0
  62681.267 KPa
2  0.005365

112.092  6.0
h   31340.634 KPa
4  0.005365

3.6 DEAD WEIGHT OF THE FURNACE

6.3.6.1 Weight of the refractory

The density of high alumina refractory bricks is given as 2579kg/m3 (Rotary kiln transport

phenomena and transport processes)

Where,

75
R= external radius of refractory shell, r = internal radius of refractory shell

6.3.6.2 Weight of steel shell

Density of steel is given as 8027Kg/m3.

Where,

R= external radius of steel shell, r = internal radius of steel shell

6.3.6.3 Weight of the content in tube


Total weight of the fluid in the tubes

6.3.6.3.1 Volume of convection section

Mass of content:
76
6.3.6.3.2 Volume of radiant section

6.3.6.4 Total dead weight

6.3.6.5 Choice of support


The support will be so strong enough to with stand the weight exerted by the furnace

Table 6.3 Summary of mechanical engineering design for pyrolysis furnace

PARAMETER VALUE

Design Temperature 400 oC

Design Pressure 112.095 KPa

Minimum thickness of shell 0.005365 m

Longitudinal stress 62681.267 KPa

Circumferencial stress 31340.634 KPa

Total force exerted on the surpport 1827.722 kN

77
CHAPTER 7

7.0 DESIGN OF HEAT EXCHANGER

7.1 PROBLEM STATEMENT

To design a heat exchanger to cool cracked gases at a flow rate of and

to cooled gases at using cooling water at to .

7.2 PARAMETERS TO CALCULATE

1) Heat transfer area

2) Bundle diameter

3) Bundle clearance

4) Heat transfer coefficient

5) Overall heat transfer coefficient

6) Tube side and Shell side fouling resistances

7) Pressure drops

7.2.1 CHEMICAL ENGINEERING CALCULATIONS

The fundamental heat transfer equation is given by,

78
The log mean temperature difference, for countercurrent flow is given by:

Where equations (5) and (6) are the dimensionless temperature ratios of the correction

factor.

79
7.2.2 Exchanger type and dimensions:

The graph of FT against S at various R values on page 9 of Perry‟s Chemical Engineers‟,

Section 11, 8th Edition gives a corresponding

Hence the chosen Heat Exchanger is 2-4 Shell-and-Tube Heat Exchangers.

7.2.3 Heat Load

80
Overall Heat Balance gives,

7.2.4 Overall coefficient:

7.2.5 Heat transfer area:

81
7.2.6 Layout and tube size:

Using a split-ring floating head exchanger. Neither fluid is corrosive, so plain carbon steel

can be used for the shell and tubes.

From the tubing characteristics as given in Perry‟s, I chose the following dimensions of the

tube.

1-inch Outer Diameter (O.D) tubes with 1.25-inch Triangular Pitch, 16 BWG

Length of tube = 6m (standard length)

7.2.7 Number of tubes

82
7.2.8 Bundle and shell diameter

For a split ring floating head exchanger,

7.2.9 Tube-side heat transfer coefficient calculations:

83
The Reynold‟s (Re) and Prandtl‟s number (Pr) of the cracked gas at the tube side is given

by,

84
Hence the Nusselt Number (Nu) is thus calculated as,

7.2.10 Shell-side heat transfer coefficient calculations:

85
Choose a baffle spacing (Lb) of 100 mm.

The shell side linear velocity is appreciable since it falls in the standard range 0.3 1.0 m/s.

Equivalent Diameter (De) of the triangular pitch is given by,

86
The Reynold‟s (Re) and Prandtl‟s number (Pr) of the cooling water at the shell side is given

by,

87
7.2.11 Overall coefficient:

Using carbon-steel for the tube and shell side because neither fluid is corrosive and the

temperature is very high.

Thermal Conductivity of carbon-steel (KW) = 55

Taking the fouling coefficients of cracked gas = 0.00030

Taking the fouling coefficients of water = 0.00090

The overall coefficient is the reciprocal of the overall resistance to heat transfer, which is

the sum of several individual resistances.

The other parameter above were defined previously, hence

+ + +

88
Since the calculated U = is above the assumed value of

Hence the design with the above parameters is accepted.

7.2.12 Tube Side Pressure Drop Calculations:

The total pressure drop at tube side is given by the equation,

Where Np = number of tube passes

L – Length of tube

For (friction factor at tube side)

The total tube side pressure drop is less than 70 kPa, hence within specification.

7.2.13 Shell Side Pressure Drop Calculations:

The shell side pressure drop is also related by the equation,

89
Where De = equivalent diameter of shell

Lb = baffle spacing

As this pressure drop on the shell side is less than 70 kPa, the design is acceptable from the

pressure drop point of view.

7.2.14 SUMMARY OF PROCESS DESIGN FOR HEAT EXCHANGER

Heat transfer area

Tube side coefficient

Shell side coefficient

90
Overall transfer coefficient, assumed

Overall transfer coefficient, required

7.3 MECHANICAL DESIGN OF HEAT EXCHANGER

7.3.1Parameters to determine

1) Shell and tube thickness

2) Shell and tube nozzle thickness design

3) Head thickness design

4) Estimation of bolt loads

5) Flange thickness design

6) Channel and channel cover

7) Gasket width

8) Axial stress in shell

Shell side Calculations:

91
Nozzles

Assume that inlet and outlet nozzles = 100 mm

92
Head

Take Torispherical heads for both ends and the following parameters are determined

bellow.

Therefore we take head thickness as that of the shell thickness = 7.0 mm

Transverse baffles

93
Tie rods and Spacers

Flange Design

Flange is ring type with plain face.

Determination of Gasket width

94
Estimation of Bolt Loads

Under atmospheric conditions, the bolt load due to gasket reaction is given by,

Load due to design pressure is also given by,

95
Calculation of Minimum bolting area

Calculation of Optimum Bolt size

Flange Thickness

96
97
Hence the thickness of flange

Tube Side Calculations:

Therefore a tube thickness of 6.0 mm was used, including corrosion allowance.

Tube Sheet thickness

The tube sheet is held between shell flange and the channel. Hence thickness of tube sheet

is given by,

98
Channel and Channel Cover

Gasket size

Gasket material: jacketed asbestos

99
Under atmospheric conditions, the bolt load due to gasket reaction is given by,

After the internal pressure is applied, the gasket which is compressed earlier, is released to

some extent and the bolt load is given by,

100
Using the larger of the above areas, determine the size of bolts,

Thickness of Nozzle

Assume that inlet and outlet nozzles = 100 mm

101
Flange Thickness

102
SUPPORT FOR SHELL AND TUBE HEAT EXCHANGER

103
Depth of Head, H = 250 mm

104
Longitudinal Bending Moments

The bending moment at the supports is given by,

The bending moment at the center of the span is given by,

105
Stress in Shell at Saddle

Stress in the shell at mid-span

The stress at the mid span is f3, which is either tensile or compressive depending on the

position of the fiber. The resultant tensile stresses (including the axial stress due to internal

pressure) should not exceed the permissible stress, and the resultant compressive stress

should not exceed the permissible compressive stress. (Sinnot, 2003)

106
Axial stress in shell due to internal pressure

The combined stresses are within the allowable limits.

The Shell-and-tube heat exchanger with the above specification is designed.

107
CHAPTER 8

8.0 DESIGN OF A QUENCH TOWER

8.1 Problem statement:

Design of a quench tower to condense the steam coming out of the furnace in a packed

tower

8.1.1 Chemical engineering design

8.1.1.1 Scope of the design:


 The superficial gas velocity

 The diameter of the column

 The dry-gas-pressure drop

 The liquid holdup in the column

 The actual pressure drop when the bed is irrigated

 The overall gas-phase transfer units

 The height of the gas-phase transfer unit

 The height of the liquid-phase transfer unit

 The overall height of a gas-phase transfer unit

 The packed height

 Residence time

 Data: The packing used is 50mm metal pall ring random packing

Cp = is a packing constant, 0.763, a = specific surface area of packing, 112.6 m2/m3,

= packing void fraction, 0.951, FP = packing factor, 27m2/m3,

Ch = is a characteristic of the particular type and size of packing, 0.784


108
Temperature =34°C
Flowrate =7589.283 kmol/hr

Gas out

1. -- Column
2
shell
2. -- Inlets
and
2 outlets for
Liquid gas and
liquids
in
Flowrate =1492.490 kmol/hr 3. -- Packing
material
Temperature
=30°C
1
3

2
Gas in

Temperature
=350°C
Flowrate =1777.473 kmol/hr

Liquid out
2
Temperature =80°C
Flowrate =7874.283
kmol/hr

Figure 8.1 A schematic diagram of a quench tower

109
8.2 Superficial gas velocity calculation

The molecular weight of the gas can be calculated as

MG = 0.0374×16 + 0.2846×28 +1.8×10-3×20 +0.1916×30 +2×10-4×44 +0.164×18

+0.0338×44 + 0.2864×2

MG =19.3864g/mol

Hence the molecular weight of the gas is 19.3864g/mol

The gas mass flow rate of the gas can be calculated as

V' = 9.571890 Kg/s

Hence the mass flow rate of the gas is 9.571890 Kg/s

The density of the gas mixture is calculated as

Hence the density of the gas mixture is 0.570832Kg/m3

The volumetric flow of the gas can be calculated as

110
ρ

Where, L = liquid mass flow rate, 39.3714Kg/s

ρG = gas density, 0.570832Kg/m3

V' = gas mass flow rate, 9.571890 Kg/s

ρL = liquid density, 1000Kg/m3 (Sinnot, 1999)

QG = is the volumetric flow rate of the gas,m3/s

The ratio of the liquid mass flow rate to the gas mass flow rate is given by

Flooding data for quench columns with countercurrent flow of gas and liquid can be

correlated in terms of the flow parameter(X) given by

ρ
ρ

Flooding curve in quench tower can be accurately described by the polynomial regression

111
Where, FP = packing factor, 27m2/m3 (Wiley and Jaime, 1987)

L = liquid viscosity, 0.001Pa-s (Sinnot, 2005)

8.2.1 Calculation of the superficial gas velocity at flooding

The superficial gas velocity can be calculated as

ρ
ρ ρ

Where, VGF = the superficial gas velocity at flooding, m/s

The superficial gas velocity at flooding is 4.8257m/s

112
8.2.2 Calculation of pressure drop at flooding

The pressure drop at flooding is strongly dependent on the packing factor for both random

and structured packings and it is given by the empirical expression:

Where, Pflood has units of Pa per meter of packed height

8.2.3 Superficial gas velocity calculation

For a given fluid flow rates and properties, and a given packing material, superficial gas

velocity can be calculated from the expression given by:

Where,VG = superficial gas velocity, m/s

f = a fraction of flooding and is usually 0.7 for quench towers (Wiley and

Jaime,1987)

Hence the superficial gas velocity VG = 3.37799m/s

The diameter of the column can be calculated from

113
D =2.49865m ≈ 2.5m

Hence the diameter of the column is 2.5m

The area of the column can be calculated as:

The wall factor can be important for columns with an inadequate ratio of effective particle

diameter to inside column diameter, and is given by:

Where, = packing void fraction, 0.951 (Wiley and Jaime,1987)

Kw = wall factor

The effective particle diameter, dp, is given by

Where, dp = the effective particle diameter, m

a = specific surface area of packing, 112.6 m2/m3 (Wiley and Jaime,1987)

114
KW = 0.9805309

The Reynolds number of the gas can be calculated as

Where, G = kinematic viscosity of the gas mixture, 3×10-5Pa.s

The Reynolds number of the gas ReG = 2756.6837

The dry-packing resistance coefficient (a modified friction factor), , is given by the

empirical expression:

Where, = the dry-packing resistance coefficient (a modified friction factor)

Cp = is a (packing constants) characteristic of the particular type and size of packing,

0.763. (Wiley and Jaime,1987)

115
The dry-packing resistance coefficient = 0.7464431

8.2.4 Calculation of dry-gas-pressure drop

The dry-gas-pressure drop can be calculated from the dimensionally consistent correlating

equation given by:

Where, Z= packing height, m

△PO = the dry-gas-pressure drop, Pa

The liquid mass velocity can be calculated as

Where, GX = liquid mass velocity, Kg/m2.s

116
=7.931453316Kg/m2.s

The Reynolds number of the liquid can be calculated as:

Hence the Reynolds number of the liquid ReL = 70.439195

The Froude number of the liquid can be calculated as

Where, FRl = Froude number of the liquid

g = acceleration due to gravity, 9.81m/s2 (Wiley and Jaime,1987)

= 7.22062728×10-4

Where, Ch = is a (packing constants) characteristic of the particular type and size of

packing, 0.784. (Wiley and Jaime,1987)


117
ah = hydraulic, or effective, specific area of packing, m2/m3

8.3 Calculation of specific liquid holdup

The specific liquid holdup (i.e. volume of liquid holdup/volume of packed bed) in the

preloading region can be calculated from the dimensionless expression:

Where, hL, = specific liquid holdup, m3 holdup/m3 packed bed

VL = superficial liquid velocity, m/s

hL= 0.047606969

Hence the liquid holdup in the column is 0.047606969

8.3.1 Calculation of pressure drop when the bed is irrigated

When the packed bed is irrigated, the liquid holdup causes the pressure drop to increase.

The Correct pressure drop for liquid holdup is calculated with the equation

Where, △p = Actual pressure drop when the bed is irrigated, Pa

118
The actual pressure drop when the bed is irrigated is therefore

8.3.2 The residence time can be evaluated as:

8.3.3 Calculation of the number of overall gas-phase transfer units

The number of overall gas-phase transfer units is given by:

Where, NOG = the number of overall gas-phase transfer units

m= is the slope of the equilibrium line

Gm/Lm= the slope of the operating line.

y1 and y2 = the mol fractions of the solute in the gas at the bottom and top of the

column, respectively.

119
For the case of quench tower use in condensing of the steam the value of is taken as

0.8 for purpose of design (Colburn, 1939)

Therefore the number of overall gas-phase transfer units is calculated as

NOG = 10.156

Hence the overall gas-phase transfer units is 10.156

8.4 Calculation of the height of gas and liquid film transfer units

The height of the gas and liquid film transfer units is given as:

Where, HG = height of a gas-phase transfer unit, m

HL = height of a liquid-phase transfer unit, m

(Sc)v = gas Schmidt number

(Sc)L = liquid Schmidt number

Dc = column diameter, m,

Z* = column height factor, m

K3 = percentage flooding correction factor


120
= HG factor

= HL factor

= liquid mass flow-rate per unit area column cross-sectional area, kg/m2s,

f1 = liquid viscosity correction factor

f2 = liquid density correction factor

f3 = surface tension correction factor

The liquid Schmidt number can be calculated as:

Hence the liquid Schmidt number is 588

The gas Schmidt number can also be calculated as:

Hence the gas Schmidt number is 3.624

121
The liquid mass flow-rate per unit area column cross-sectional area is given by:

Therefore the mass flow-rate per unit area column cross-sectional area is 8.020676 Kg/m2s

For 70%flooding, = 8.020675846 and liquid temperature of 30°C ,the values of the

various parameters are given as

K3= 0.85, = 80, Z* =8m, f1=f2=f3=1 (Sinnot,2005)

The height of a gas-phase transfer unit is evaluated as

Therefore the height of a gas-phase transfer unit is 0.852m

Also, the height of a liquid-phase transfer unit is evaluated as

Hence the height of a liquid-phase transfer unit is 0.726m

8.4.1Calculation of the overall height of a gas-phase transfer unit

The overall height of a gas-phase transfer unit is given by:

122
HOG = 0.852 +0.8×0.726 = 1.4328m

Hence the overall height of a gas-phase transfer unit is 1.4328m

8.5 Calculation of the packed height

Therefore the packed height is calculated as

Z = 10.156×1.4238 = 13.897m

Hence the packed height Z =14m

Table 8.1 Summary of chemical engineering design for quench tower

Parameter value

The superficial gas velocity, m/s 4.8257

The diameter of the column, m 2.5

The dry-gas-pressure drop, Pa/m 325

The liquid holdup in the column 0.0476

The actual pressure drop when the bed is irrigated, Pa/m 499

The overall gas-phase transfer units 10.156

The height of the gas-phase transfer unit, m 0.852

The height of the liquid-phase transfer unit, m 0.726

The overall height of a gas-phase transfer unit, m 1.4238

The packed height, m 14

Residence time, seconds(s) 28

123
8.6 Mechanical Engineering Design of a Quench Tower

8.6.1 Column Design Specifications

Total column height 18 m

Internal diameter 2.5 m

Operating pressure 1.5 bar

Operating temperatures 350°C-34°C

Material of construction is stainless steel type 304

Design stress 125 MPa

Density of the stainless steel, ρs = 8030 kg/m3

Vessel fully radiographed (joint factor 1)

The design pressure (P) is chosen to be 10% above the operating pressure, (Sinnot, 2005)

= 1.10x 1.5 bar

= 1.65bar

Minimum thickness (ts,) of the shell cylinder required for pressure loading:

Where, ts = Minimum thickness of the shell cylinder required for pressure loading, mm

P = the design pressure, bar

Di = Internal diameter of the column, m

124
C = corrosion allowance, mm

J = weld joint factor

ts = 28mm

Hence Minimum thickness (ts,) of the shell cylinder required for pressure loading is taken

as 28mm

The minimum thickness of ellipsoidal heads is given as

Therefore, 28mm plating is chosen for the column heads (for uniformity).

8.6.2 Calculations of Other Stresses

8.6.3 Dead weight stress

Volume = column shell + column heads

π
π

Where, Di = internal diameter of the column, m

HT = Total height of the column, m

ts = column thickness, m

125
π
π

Volume = 4.047075055 + 0.107992247 = 4.16m3

Density of shell material = 8030kg/m3 (Perry, 1997)

Mass of shell material = volume × density

Mass of shell material = 4.16×8030

Mass of shell material (mS) = 33404.8kg

Mass of water in the column = 4216.83 Kg

Mass of insulation

Mineral wool density = 130Kg/m3

Where, HT =Total column height, m

tins = insulation mineral wool thickness, mm

Va = Approximate volume of insulation, m3

Va = π 2 18 75 10-3

Va = 8.48m3

The approximate volume is 8.48m3

126
Mass of insulation = density× volume

Mass of insulation =130×8.48

Mass of insulation (mins) =1102.4Kg

To allow for fittings the mass of insulation is multiply by two

Therefore the mass of insulation = 2×1102.4

Mass of insulation = 2204.8 Kg

Mass of packing

Metal pall ring 50mm density =353Kg/m3

Mass of packing =density× Area of column ×packed height

Mass of packing =353× 4.909 ×14

Mass of packing =19060.63Kg

Total mass = mass of shell + mass of the Internals to the column+ mass of water in the

column+ mass of insulation

Total mass = 33404.8 + 19060.63 + 2204.8+4216.83

Total mass = 74014.4kg

Total weight of the column and contents (wT) =74014.4×9.81

Total weight of the column and contents (wT) = 726kN

8.7 Dead Weight stress

127
π

DO = Di+2ts

DO = 2.5 + 2(0.028)

DO = 2.556m

Where, DO = Mean diameter, mm

m = total mass of the column and contents, Kg

g = acceleration due to gravity, 9.81m/s2

Weight stress = 3MPa

Axial stress

Axial stress = 27MPa

8.7.1 Hoop stress

Hoop stress = 2×Axial stress

Hoop stress = 2×27

Hoop stress = 54MPa


128
8.7.2 The bending stress is given as:

Wind loading

Wind velocity (max) V, = 160 km/h (Sinnott, 2005)

Wind velocity which correspond to Dynamic wind-pressure loading of 1280Pa (Sinnott,

2005)

Bending moment (Mx) at bottom tangent line

Where, Mx = Bending moment at bottom tangent line, Nm

FW =Wind loading, N/m

HT = the total height of the column, m

Where, tins =insulation mineral wool thickness, mm

Wp = Dynamic wind-pressure loading, Pa

FW = (2.5+2(28+75)×10-3)×1280

FW = 3527.68N/m

129
Bending moment at bottom tangent line Mx = 571484.16Nm

Where, DO =Mean diameter, including insulation, mm

Moment of inertial (I) = 0.178m4

Bending stress = 4MPa

8.8 Analysis of stress

8.8.1Upwind

Total stress =Bending stress +Axial stress – Radial stress

Total stress = 4MPa +27MPa – 3MPa

Total stress = 28MPa

8.8.2 Downwind

Total stress = bending stress +Hoop stress – Radial stress

Total stress = 4MPa+54MPa – 3MPa

Total stress = 55MPa

Therefore the maximum stress is 55MPa

130
The maximum stress is more than 43% below the design stress of 125 MPa, and therefore

the shell design is considered acceptable.

8.8.3 Design of skirt support for the quench tower

The resultant stresses in the skirt will be:

Where,

bS = bending stress in the skirt

WS = The dead weight stress in the skirt

Bending moment at base of skirt (Ms)

Where, FW =Wind loading, N/m

Hs= height of skirt and column, m

MS = maximum bending moment, evaluated at the base of the skirt (due to wind, seismic

and eccentric loads), Nm

W = total weight of the vessel and contents, N

Ds = inside diameter of the skirt, at the base, m


131
ts = skirt thickness, m

Bending moment at base of skirt,

Ms = 778.365kNm

8.8.4 Bending stress in the skirt,

bS= 5.6N/mm2

The maximum dead weight load on the skirt will occur when the vessel is full of water.

Where, Di = internal diameter of column, m

HT = the total height of the column, m

Density of water, Kg/m3

= Acceleration due to gravity, m/s2

Approximate weight = 867kN

Weight of vessel and its content = mg

Weight of vessel and its content = 74014.4×9.81


132
Weight of vessel and its content (W) = 726kN

Total weight = (867+726) kN

Total weight =1593kN

8.9The dead weight stress in the skirt is given by:

Where, WS = The dead weight stress in the skirt, N/mm2

W = total weight of the vessel and contents, N

Ds = inside diameter of the skirt, at the base, mm

ts = skirt thickness, mm

WS(operating) = 3.26N/mm2

WS(test) = 3.90N/mm2

Maximum compressive stress = (5.6+3.9)N/mm2 = 9.5 N/mm2

Maximum tensile stress = (5.6 - 3.26) N/mm2 = 2.34 N/mm2

Base ring and anchor bolt design


133
Assume approximate pitch circle bolt diameter, say, 2.2 m

Circumference of bolt circle = 2200π

Closest multiple of 4 = 12 bolts

The anchor bolts are assumed to share the overturning load equally, and the bolt area

required is given by:

Where, Ab = area of one bolt at the root of the thread, mm2,

Nb = number of bolts,

fb= maximum allowable bolt stress, N/mm2; typical design value 125N/mm2

Ms = bending (overturning) moment at the base, Nm,

W = weight of the vessel, N,

Da =assumed bolt circle diameter, m.

Ab= 466.8mm2

Using M30 bolts (BS 4190:1967) root area = 561 mm2

Ab =561mm2

134
The bolt root diameter (Db) is given by:

Db = 27mm

The bolt root diameter is therefore 27mm.

The base ring must be sufficiently wide to distribute the load to the foundation. The total

compressive load on the base ring is given by:

π π

π π

Fb = 362kN/m

Where, Fb = the compressive load on the base ring, Newtons per linear metre,

DS = skirt diameter, 2m.

The minimum width of the base ring is given by:

Where, Lb = base ring width, mm

135
fc = the maximum allowable bearing pressure on the concrete foundation and is

taken as 5 N/mm2

Actual width required = Lr + ts +50mm

Actual width required = 76 + 30 +50mm

Actual width required = 156mm

Where, Lr = the distance from the edge of the skirt to the outer edge of the ring,mm

Actual bearing pressure on concrete foundation required is given by:

The minimum thickness is given by:

Where, = base ring thickness, mm,

= actual bearing pressure on base. N/mm2,

= allowable design stress in the ring material, typically 140 N/mm2.

136
Round off to 20mm

The minimum base ring thickness is = 20mm.

Table 8.2 Summary of mechanical design of the quench tower

Parameter Value

Thickness of the shell, mm 28

Dead weight stress , MPa 3

Axial stress, MPa 27

Hoop stress, MPa 54

Bending stress, MPa 4

Total Upwind Stress, MPa 28

Total Downwind Stress, MPa 55

Table 8.3 Summary of mechanical design of the skirt support for the quench tower

Parameter Value

Skirt thickness, mm 30

Bending stress in the skirt, N/mm2 5.60

The dead weight stress in the skirt, N/mm2 3.27

Maximum tensile stress, N/mm2 2.34

Maximum compressive stress, N/mm2 9.50

137
Table 8.4 Summary of mechanical design for base ring and anchor bolt

Parameter Value

Base ring width, mm 156

Bolt diameter, mm 27

Compressive force on base ring, N/m 362000

Base ring thickness, mm 20

138
CHAPTER 9

9.0 DESIGN OF A CAUSTIC TOWER

9.1 Problem Statement

To design a caustic tower to absorb CO2 from an ethylene gas stream entering at feed

conditions of 35°C and 3500kPa.

Illustration of problem statement

L2 = 2233.073 kmol/hr
X2 = 0.0

G2 = 1481.664kmol/hr
y2 = 3ppm

G1 = 1488.71549 Kmol/hr
y1 = 0.0021
L1 = 2236.195 Kmol/hr
X1 = 0.0014

9.2 CHEMICAL ENGINEERING PROCESS DESIGN OF ABSORBER

Basis:

1 Hour of Operation

Assuming negligible absorption of the other gases and at average temperature of the gas

inside the tower at 35 0C.

139
Table 9.1: Composition of the Incoming Gas:

Component Amount in Mole

kmoles fraction

Methane 66.4062 0.0446

Ethane 340.545 0.2287

Propane 60.0818 0.0404

H2O 0.29189 0.0002

Hydrogen 509.1142 0.3420

Acetylene 3.1622 0.0021

Ethylene 505.952 0.3399

CO2 3.1622 0.0021

TOTAL 1488.71549 1.0000

9.2.1 Heat of Reaction

The chemical reaction across the tower is

CO2 (g) + 2NaOH (aq)  Na2CO3(s) + H2O (l)

This is a fast second order reaction.

∆H°r = Σ|r|∆H°f(products) - Σ|r|∆H°f(reactants)

Hf°CO2 (g) = -393.5 kJ/mol Hf°NaOH (aq) = -469.6 kJ/mol Hf°NaCO3(s) = -1130.77 kJ/mol

Hf°H2O (l) = -285.8 kJ/mol

∆H°r = (-1130.77-285.8)-(-393.5-2×469.6) = -83.87 kJ/mol (exothermic)

140
9.2.2 Calculating liquid flow rate

G1= 1488.71549kmol/hr = 0.4135kmol/s y1 = 0.0021

Y1= 0.0021044, Y is the mole ratio

y2 = 3ppm

Y2 = 3×

Gs=0.4135 (1-0.0021) = 0.4126kmol/s, where Gs is the flow rate of the inert gas

X2 = 0

p°CO2 = 7350917.175 Pa, where p°CO2 is the partial pressure of CO2 at 31°C

Pt = 3500000pa, where Pt is the total pressure of the gas

Y*= 2.1

Y* = 2.1x, Henry‟s law

Min Ls =

For 1.5 times the minimum, Ls= 1.5×0.4129 = 0.619 kmol/s

X1= 0.0014

141
L2 2231.52Kmol/hr G2 1481.664kmol/hr

x2 0.0 y2 3ppm

L1 2228.4Kmol/hr G1 1488.71549 Kmol/hr

x1 0.0014 y1 0.0021

G = total flow rate of gas entering/exiting the tower

y = mole fraction of CO2 in entering/exiting gas stream

L = total flow rate of liquid leaving/entering the tower

x = mole fraction of CO2/NaCO3 in entering/exit liquid stream

9.2.3 Calculating for the mass velocity of the gas and the liquid

Average molecular weight of the gas = [16×66.4062 + 30×340.545 + 44×60.0818 +

18×0.29189 + 2×509.1142 + 26×3.1622 + 28×505.952 + 44×3.1622]/1488.71549

MwG= 19.704 Kg/Kmoles

Now considering 20wt% of NaOH solution

Finding the mole fraction of NaOH(XNaOH) in this solution using the relation

X NaOH 
Wi M W i 
Wi M W i   1  Wi) M W H2 0 
X NaOH 
0.20 / 40
0.20 40  0.80 18
X NaOH  0.1011 X H2O  0.8989

Hence calculating for the average molecular weight of the solvent

142

M W SOLUTION   X NaOH M NaOH   X H 2O M H 2O 
M W SOLUTION  0.1011 40  0.8989 18
M W SOLUTION  20.2242 Kg/kmol

Mass flow rate (L1) of liquid at the bottom of the column

L1  L1  M W so ln  2228.4kmol / hr  20.2242kg / kmol


L1  45067.60728Kg / hr
L1  12.519 Kg / s

Calculating for mass flow rate (G1) of inlet gas at the bottom of the column

G1 = 1488.71549×19.704 = 29333.65001 kg/hr

G1 = 8.148 Kg/s

9.2.4 Physical Properties of gas and liquid

Gas density ρg= [3500× ×19.704] / [8314 x 308.15] = 26.92 kg/m3

Liquid density ρL = 1213.5 kg/m3

Liquid viscosity µL = 0.00317kg/m.s

Volumetric flow rate of gas= 0.298m3/s

9.2.5 Type and size of packing

As a rough guide, packing sizes of 25 mm or larger are ordinarily used for gas rates of 0.25

m3/s, and 50 mm or larger for gas rates of 1 .0m3/s or more.

(Principles and Modern Applications of Mass Transfer Operations, 2nd Edition, Page 222)

Packing type: 38mm ceramic Raschig rings


143
Bulk density of packing = 689kg/m3

Surface area of packing per unit volume, a = 128m2/m3

Packing factor,FP =310/m

0.5
L1  ρ g 
FLV  1  
G  ρl 
Hence substituting the values of the parameters in the equation
0.5
12.519  26.92 
FLV     0.229
8.148  1213.5 

From the generalized pressure drop correlation given in Richardson and Coulson, pg 603

K4 = 2.1

= 2.137 Kg/ m2s

Then, the cross section area required,

Diameter, d =

144
D= 2.203m

Column diameter = 2.203m

9.2.6 Pressure drop and percent loading

For gas flow rate of Gy = 7693.063kg/m2h = 1575.66 lb/ft2h

∆P = 1.0 inches water/ft packing when dry (McCabe and smith, pg 570)

∆P =25.4mm

K4 = 0.723

Then,

% loading = = 58.7%

9.2.7 Wetting rate

A useful measure of the effectiveness of wetting of the available area is the wetting rate LW

defined as:

volumetric liquid rate per unit cross - sectional area of column


Packing surface area per unit volume of column

Volumetric liquid rate per unit cross-sectional area =

12.519kg/s
LW 
1213.5kg/m  128m 2 /m 3  3.813m 2
3

L W  2.11  10 -5 m 3 /m 2 s

145
Absorption and stripping tower by Morris and Jackson, recommends wetting rate of

2.0×10-5m3/m2s and above for packing size between 25mm and 75mm.

9.2.8 Liquid hold up

Hw = 0.143

L* = liquid mass flow rate per unit area of column = 3.283kg/m2s

Hw = 0.143

Hw = 0.182 m3 of liquid/m3 of column

9.2.9 Residence time

Γ=Hw v/V (liquid hold up volume of packing/ liquid volumetric flow rate)

Γ= (0.182 18.528)/ 0.0103

Residence time = 326.87s = 5.4min

9.2.10 Packed Tower height

The equation for column height can be written as follows:

ZT =

ZT = HoyNoy

Hoy = in terms of partial pressure driving force

GM = 390.43mol/m2h (molar flow rate per cross sectional area)

Gy = 7693.063kg/m2h = 1575.66 lb/ft2h

146
KGa = 1.4 mol/ft3h.atm = 4.879×10-4mol/m3hPa

(Unit operations of chemical engineering, McCabe and Smith, seventh edition, pg603)

Hoy =

Hoy = 0.229m

Noy =

Where a= top of column, b= bottom of column

x a= 0 xb = 0.0014 ya = 3×10-6 yb = 0.0021

y* = 2.1x

yb* = 2.1×0.0014 = 0.00294

ya* = 0

∆y = yb-ya = 0.0021-3×10-6 = 0.00297

At the bottom of the column, yb-yb* = 0.0021-0.00294 = -0.00084

At the top, ya-ya* = ya = 0.000003

Noy = = 1.496×10-4

Noy = 19.852

ZT = 0.229×19.852 = 4.546m

Height of packing = 4.546m

147
Table 9.2: Free spaces in Packed Tower

Location Distance
Purpose

Tower top above distributor 90cm Demister pads to remove liquid droplets from

the clean flue gas

Distributor 50cm Space for distribution

Between beds and top distributor and bed40cm Prevent excessive carryover of liquid

Between top of inlet gas nozzle and


50cm Prevent excessive carryover of liquid

bottom support plate

Source: (Rase, 1977)

Total height of free spaces in column = 230cm = 2.3m

Table 9.3: Summary of Chemical Engineering Design

Parameter Value

Column diameter 2.203m

Height of packed bed 4.546m

Height of column 6.846m

Overall mass transfer coefficient 4.879×10-4mol/m3hPa

Wetting rate 2.1110-5 m3 /m 2s

Liquid hold up 0.182 m3/m3

% Loading 58.7%

Residence time 5.4min

Choice of packing Raschig rings (ceramic)

Packing size 38mm

Type of installation Random

148
9.3 MECHANICAL DESIGN OF ABSORPTION COLUMN

Inner Diameter of tower, Di = 2.203 m

Height of the packing required = 4.546m

Skirt height = 2m

Density of material column = 7700 Kg/m3

Wind pressure, Pw = 130 Kg/m2

Material: Carbon Steel

Permissible tensile stress (f) = 950kg/cm2

9.3.1 Thickness of Shell:

Thickness of shell, ts = [p D / (2f J – p)] + c

Where,

Inner Diameter of vessel, Di = 2203 mm

Working Pressure = 3500×103 N/m2

Design Pressure, p = 3850×103 N/m2= 3.850 N/mm2

Permissible Stress = 135N/mm2

Joint Efficiency (J) = 0.85

Corrosion allowance = 2mm

Hence,

ts= (3.85×2203)/[(2×135×0.85-3.85]+2

ts= 37.47mm

So outer diameter of shell Do = 2.203 m + (2×0.03747m) = 2.278 m

149
9.3.2 Weight of Packed Tower

Thickness of tower = 37.47mm = 0.03747m

Overall height of tower h = 4.546m+2.30m = 6.846m

Diameter = 2.203m

Outer diameter of the shell (Do) = 2.278m

Implies radius, r = 1.139m

Volume of material of construction  2rht  ht 2

= 2  ×1.139×6.846×0.03747+  ×6.846×0.037472

= 1.866m³

Density of carbon steel = 7700Kg/m³

Therefore mass of carbon steel = 7700×1.866

= 14368.2Kg

Weight of the tower is therefore = 14368.2× 9.81 = 140952N

9.3.3 Weight of Packing

Packing volume = Ah

Height of packed bed = 4.546m

Area = = 4.076 m2

Volume = 4.076m2×4.546 m = 18.528m3

150
Bulk density of packing = 689 Kg/m³

Mass of packing = 689×18.528 = 12765.739Kg

Thus total dead weight = 12765.739 + 14368.2

= 27133.939 Kg

Vessel volume = 6.846m×4.076m2 = 27.904m³

9.3.4 Skirt Thickness

The skirt thickness must be sufficient to withstand the dead-weight loads and bending

moments imposed on it by the vessel.

The resultant stress in the skirt will be

 s (Tensile) =  bs   ws

 s (Comprehensive) =  bs   ws

Where

 bs = bending stress in the skirt

4Ms
 bs 
 ( Ds  ts )tsDs

 ws = dead weight stress in the skirt

W
 ws 
 (Ds  ts)ts

151
Where

Ms = maximum bending moment, evaluated at the base of the skirt

W = total weight of the vessel and contents

Ds = inside diameter of the skirt, at the base

ts = skirt thickness

Dynamic wind pressure = 1280 N/m2

Mean diameter = 2.203 + 2(0.0543) = 2.3116m

Loading per linear mater (Fw) = 1280N/m2×2.278m

= 2915.84 N/m

9.3.5 Bending moment, Ms

Fw  h 2 2915.84  (6.846) 2
Ms   = 68329.38051Nm
2 2

Ds = 2.278m = 2278mm

Weight of vessel, W= 27133.939kg ×9.81ms-2 = 266183.9416N

The maximum dead weight load on the skirt would occur when the drum is full of the

solvent NaOH.


Approximate weight = ( x 2.2782 x 6.846) x 1213.5 x 9.81
4

= 332156.6897N

152
Therefore total weight, W = 266183.941 + 332156.689 = 598340.63N

= 598.341kN

ts = 35mm

4Ms 4(598340.63) x 103


 bs  
 (Ds  ts)tsDs  (2278  35) (2278  35)

= 3.855 N/mm2

W 598340.63
 ws  
 (Ds  ts)ts  (2278  35)35

= 2.1952 N/mm2

 s (tensile) =  bs -  ws

= 3.855 – 2.1952 = 1.6598 N/mm2

 s (comprehensive) =  bs +  ws

3.855+2.1952 = 6.0502N/mm2

9.3.6 Criteria for design

The skirt thickness should be such that under the worst combination of wind and dead-

weight loading the following design criteria are not exceeded (Sinnott Vol 6, page 846):

s

s

153
fs = maximum allowable design stress for the skirt material, normally taken at ambient

temperature, 20oC

J = weld joint factor

s = base angle of a conical skirt, normally 80o to 90o

E = Young‟s modulus, for steel at ambient temperature, E = 200000N/mm2

Considering the design criteria

 s (tensile) ≤ fs J sin s

1.6598≤ 0.85 135 sin 90

1.6598≤ 114.75

 s (compressive) > 0.125E(ts / Ds) sin s

6.0502≤ 0.125 x 200000 x (20 / 457) sin 90

6.0502≤ 1094.09

Both criteria are satisfied, and thus skirt support thickness is 35mm (Sinnott, vol. 6 Pg 848-

850)

9.3.7 Primary Stresses

1. Longitudinal and circumferential stresses due to pressure (internal and external)

given by

PDi
h 
2t
PDi
L 
4t
154
Where h = circumferential stresses

L= longitudinal stresses

P is the design pressure in the absorber

Di = is the internal diameter of the absorber

t = thickness of the vessel

3.850  2203
h   113.18 N / mm2
2  37.47
3.850  2203
L   56.59 N / mm2
4  37.47

2. Direct stress due to the weight of the vessel, its contents and any attachments.

W 266183.9416
w    1.009 N / mm2
 ( Di  t )t  (2203  37.47)37.47

9.3.8 Base ring and Anchor Bolts:

Approximate pitch circle diameter = 1.5m

Circumference of bolt circle = 1500π

1500
Number of bolts required, at recommended bolt spacing =  7.8  8
600

Scheiman gives the following guide rules which can be used for the selection of the anchor

bolts:

1. Bolts smaller than 25 mm (1 in.) diameter should not be used.

2. Minimum number of bolts 8.

3. Use multiples of 4 bolts.

155
4. Bolt pitch should not be less than 600 mm (2 ft).

(Sinnot, volume 6, pg 848)

Table 9.4: Summary of Mechanical Engineering Design

Parameter Value

Equipment(shell) thickness 37.47mm

Weight of tower 140952N

Weight of packing 125231.9N

Vessel volume 27.904m3

Skirt thickness 20mm

Longitudinal stress 56.59N/mm2

Circumferential stress 113.18N/mm2

Direct stress 1.009N/mm2

No. Of bolts 8

Bending moment 68329.38Nm

Type support Straight skirt

156
CHAPTER 10

10.0 DESIGN OF SPRAY TOWER

10.1 PROBLEM STATEMENT

In the production of ethylene and acetylene, the removal of water is very crucial. This is

because, water that accumulate during the process will turn into its solid form (ice) when

the separation process of the gas mixture into individual required components is being

done. The aim of the design is to remove almost all the amount of water in the gas mixture

using a spray tower at a lower operating cost.

10.2 JUSTIFICATION

The mixture of gases ready to undergo separation into their individual has water in it. The

exposure of the gas mixture to water sprayed at Tdp over a period of time will allow all the

water to be collected downstream. In this way about 96% of the water is sure to be

removed. By this process, the gas mixture is ready to be separated into individual gases.

10.3 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF A SPRAY TOWER

Outlet air(Gas mixture)

Water cooler

Inlet air(Gas mixture)

157
10.4 CHEMICAL ENGINEERING DESIGN

Mass flowrate of inlet gas= Gin

Mass flowrate of outlet gas= Gout

Mass flowrate of inlet water(sprayed water)= Lin

Mass flowrate of outlet water(condensed water)=Lout

Lin

Gout

Gin

Lout

Gin = 29438.1762

Therefore the amount of water entering the spray tower = 87.9234 kg/hr

Therefore to find the flowrate of the exit gas stream = 29241.1306kg/hr

But water of 2ppm is the least that can be allowed in the mixture without effect on the

result.

2ppm which is 0.0002% of the total amount present;

Taking an ideal system,

Lin = Lout
158
…………………………………..(tosun, 2007)

10.4.1The diameter of the spray tower column

…………………………………………….. (tosun, 2007)

Where D is the diameter of the tower

Ga is the mass flowrate of the inlet gas

is thedensity

V is the velocity of the gas particles

Assuming ideal gas situation:

But P, pressure is 3500kPa, T = 313K

Average molecular weight of the gas, M = [16×66.4062 + 30×340.545 + 44×60.0818 +

18×0.29189 + 2×509.1142 + 26×3.1622 + 28×505.952 + 44×3.1622]/1488.71549

MwG= 19.704 Kg/Kmoles

Get tight in the main door close to the housing of it

159
l= 8.90 10-4Pa.s or 10-3Ns/m

The velocity of the gas is assumed to be the same as the mass velocity since the gas mixture

is in vapour form(perry cha 6 pg 6-7)

V = 1485.36kmol every hour

D = 3.878m

10.4.2Terminal velocity of water droplets

An assumption is made;

 that all the water droplets are spherical in shape,

 that the droplet is rigid,

 and applying the force balance between buoyancy and drag forces.

……………………………..( Zheng L.1997)

But;

160
d = 0.09551 m

Ut = 0.005283 m/s

10.4.3 The tower height

H = vtt………………………………….(tosun, 2007)

Where H is the height of the tower,

vt is the terminal velocity of the water particles

t is the time for the unsteady state energy balance around the condensed water

10.4.4The cooling time

10.4.4.1 Cooling period


Lin = Lout

…………………………………(tosun, 2007)

is the heat capacity of the water.

a = 1.82964 10 b = 4.72118 10-1 c = -1.33678 10-3 d = 1.31424 10-6

Cpl = 1.82964 10+(4.72118 10-1 313)+(-1.33678 10-3 3132)+(1.31424 10-


6
3133)

Cpl = 18.2964+147.7730-130.9630+40.3002
161
Cpl = 75.4066J/mol.K

is the mean temperature Ta(in) – Ta(out)/2

Tdp is dew point

It is assumed that the pressure of the inlet water is at atmospheric pressure

The actual vapour pressure of water (p) at 40 °C is 0.0728atm (7376.46Pa)

Where dv represent volumetric humidity

Therefore dv = 0.051069kg.m-3

Therefore …………………..T G Anthony & P R Clarke(2006)

Where ps is saturation vapour pressure

And f is enhancement factor is f

f = 1+A+P[B+C(T+D+EP)2]……………………………….(Buck A. 1981)

f = 1+(4.8 10-4)+35000[(3.47 10-6)+5.9 10-10(313+0-(0 35000)2]

f = 1.1284

Therefore

ps = 2556.89 Pa

162
to find the dew point; the temperature at which the water in the gas mixture begins to

condense.

………………………………(tosun, 2007)

tdp = 21.4922=21.5 °C

thus a temperature below this will condense the water in the mixture.

(40-21.5) °C = 24.5 °C/2=9.25 °C 12.5

12°C is assumed to be the temperature(modeling in transport)

therefore

……………………………..(tosun, 2007)

t1 = 1880.5445s = 31.34 min

10.4.4.1Height of tower
H = terminal velocity×time for cooling

H = Ut×t

H = 0.005283×1880.5447

H = 9.935m

163
The overall mass transfer coefficient is Kg

= 5.1878 × 10-5m3/m2s

10.4.6 The number of nozzles required

Assume a water flow of 50gal/min (3.2 L/s) per nozzle; this is a typical flow rate for usual

cooling-tower nozzles. Then, the number of nozzles required equals 10,000 gal/(min)/(50

gal/min per nozzle) = 200 nozzles. If six nozzles are used in each spray group in a series of

crossed arms, with each arm containing one or more nozzles, then 200 nozzles divided by 6

nozzles per spray group means that 33 1/3 spray groups will be needed. Since a partial

spray group is seldom used, 34 spray groups would be chosen.

(handbook of chem. Eng cal)

where σ = surface tension, mJ/m2 (dyne/cm),

Pch = Sugden's parachor,

pL = liquid density, kg/m3,

pv — density of the saturated vapour, kg/m3,

M — molecular mass.

σ, pi, pv evaluated at the system temperature


164
Pch ( Sugden's parachor) = (H×1) + (OH×1)+ (O×1)

= (17.1×1)+(11.3×1)+(20.0×1)

= 48.4

= 49.20mJ/m2

10.6.1.1 Summary of chemical engineering design


Table 10.1 Chemical engineering design of spray tower

Parameter Value

Column diameter 3.878m

Column height 9.94m

Terminal velocity 0.005283m/s

Dew point 21.5 C

Water temperature(inlet) 12 C

Residence time 31.34minutes

Overall Mass Transfer Coefficient 5.1878  10-54mol/m3hPa

Number of spray groups 34

Number of nozzles per spray 200 nozzles

10.6 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING DESIGN

Inner Diameter of tower, Di = 3.878m

Skirt height = 2m

Density of material column = 7700 Kg/m3

165
Wind pressure, Pw = 130 Kg/m2

Material: Carbon Steel

Permissible tensile stress (f) = 950kg/cm2

10.6.1 Thickness Of Shell:

Thickness of shell, ts = [p D / (2f J – p)] + c

Where,

Inner Diameter of vessel, Di = 3878 mm

Working Pressure = 3500×103 N/m2

Design Pressure, p = 3850×103 N/m2= 3.850 N/mm2

Permissible Stress = 135N/mm2

Joint Efficiency (J) = 0.85

Corrosion allowance = 2mm

Hence,

ts= (3.85×3878)/[(2×135×0.85-3.85]+2

ts= 68.17mm

So outer diameter of shell Do = 3.878 m + (2×0.06617m) = 4.0103 m

10.6.2 Weight of Spray Tower

Thickness of tower = 69.17mm = 0.06917m

Diameter = 3.878m

Outer diameter of the shell (Do) = 4.0103m

Implies radius, r = 2.0052m

166
Volume of material of construction  2rht  ht 2

= 2  ×2.0052×9.94×0.06917+  ×9.94×0.069172

= 8.8119 m³

Density of carbon steel = 7700Kg/m³

Therefore mass of carbon steel = 7700×8.8119

= 67851.63 Kg

Weight of the tower is therefore = 67851.63× 9.81 = 665624N

Area = = 6.0915 m2

Vessel volume = 6.0915×9.94 = 60.549m2

10.6.3 Skirt Thickness

The skirt thickness must be sufficient to withstand the dead-weight loads and bending

moments imposed on it by the vessel.

The resultant stress in the skirt will be

 s (Tensile) =  bs   ws

 s (Comprehensive) =  bs   ws

Where

 bs = bending stress in the skirt

167
4Ms
 bs 
 ( Ds  ts )tsDs

 ws = dead weight stress in the skirt

W
 ws 
 (Ds  ts)ts

Where

Ms = maximum bending moment, evaluated at the base of the skirt

W = total weight of the vessel and contents

Ds = inside diameter of the skirt, at the base

ts = skirt thickness

Dynamic wind pressure = 1280 N/m2

Mean diameter = 3.878 + 2(0.0543) = 3.9866m

Loading per linear mater (Fw) = 1280N/m2×2.278m

= 2915.84 N/m

The weight of the spray nozzles is approximated to be 500kg

Thus total dead weight = 67851.63+500

= 68351.63kg

10.6.4 Bending moment, Ms

Ds = 4.0103m = 4010.3mm

168
Weight of vessel, W= 68351.63kg ×9.81ms-2 = 669845.97N


Approximate weight = ( x 4.01032 x 9.94) x 1000 x 9.81
4

= 1230427.61N

Therefore total weight, W = 669845.97+ 1230427.61= 1900273.31N

= 1900.27kN

ts = 66mm

4Ms 4(1900273.31) x 10 3
 bs  
 (Ds  ts)tsDs  (4010.3  66) (4010.3  66)

= 3.242N/mm2

W 1900273.31
 ws  
 (Ds  ts)ts  (4010.3  66)66

= 2.148 N/mm2

 s (tensile) =  bs -  ws

=3.242 – 2.148= 1.094 N/mm2

 s (comprehensive) =  bs +  ws

3.242+2.148 = 5.390/mm2

10.6.5 Criteria for design

The skirt thickness should be such that under the worst combination of wind and dead-

weight loading the following design criteria are not exceeded (Sinnott Vol 6, page 846):
169
s

s

fs = maximum allowable design stress for the skirt material, normally taken at ambient

temperature, 20oC

J = weld joint factor

s = base angle of a conical skirt, normally 80o to 90o

E = Young‟s modulus, for steel at ambient temperature, E = 200000N/mm2

10.6.6 Base ring and Anchor Bolts

Approximate pitch circle diameter = 1.5m

Circumference of bolt circle = 1500π

1500
Number of bolts required, at recommended bolt spacing =  7.8  8 (closest
600

multiple of 4 to answer calculated)

Scheiman gives the following guide rules which can be used for the selection of the anchor

bolts:

1. Bolts smaller than 25 mm (1 in.) diameter should not be used.

2. Minimum number of bolts 8.

3. Use multiples of 4 bolts.

4. Bolt pitch should not be less than 600 mm (2 ft).

(Sinnot, volume 6, pg 848)

170
Direct stress due to the weight of the vessel, its contents and any attachments.

W 665624
w    0.762 N / mm 2
 ( Di  t )t  (4010.3  68.17)68.17

Table 10.2 Mechanical Engineering Design

Parameter Value

Equipment(shell) thickness 68.17mm

Weight of tower 665624N

Vessel volume 60.549m3

Direct stress 0.762

No. Of bolts 8

Bending moment 98854.38Nm

Type support Straight skirt

171
CHAPTER 11

11.0 DESIGN OF A DE-METHANIZER

11.1 PROBLEM STATEMENT

This section of the project is aimed at designing a demethanizer which would serve the

purpose of separating methane and hydrogen constituents from the condensed cracked gas

stream.

11.2 CHEMICAL ENGINEERING DESIGN

Determining the number of stages required for the desired degree of separation and the

location of the feed tray is merely the first steps in producing an overall column design.

Other things that need to be considered are tray spacings; column diameter; internal

configurations; heating and cooling duties.

Condenser

L Splitter Distillate, D
D = 577.7694 kmol/hr

Feed, F
F = 1448.2614 kmol/hr

V‟

L‟
Re-boiler Bottoms product, B
B = 870.4920 kmol/hr

172
Fig 2 – Diagram of problem statement

In the figure 2 above:

F = Flow rate of the feed stream, B = Flow rate of the bottoms product stream

D = Flow rate of the distillate stream, L = Flow returned as reflux

L‟ = Flow of liquid at the bottom, V = Flow rate of vapour at the top

V‟ = Flow rate of vapour from re-boiler into column

Table 11.1 Feed stream (F) specifications for demethanizer

Component Mole fraction

Hydrogen, H2 0.350

Methane, CH4 0.046

Ethane, C2H6 0.222

Acetylene, C2H2 0.002

Ethylene, C2H4 0.340

Propane, C3H8 0.040

Flow rate = 1488.094 kmol/hr

Temperature = -120oC

Pressure = 2000kPa

Table 11.2: Bottoms stream (B) specifications for demethanizer

Component Mole fraction

Ethane, C2H6 0.3693

173
Acetylene, C2H2 0.0033

Ethylene, C2H4 0.5600

Propane, C3H8 0.0666

Methane, CH4 0.0008

Flow rate = 894.434 kmol/hr

Temperature = 6.05oC

Pressure = 3600kPa

Table 11.3: Distillate stream (D) specifications for demethanizer

Component Mole fraction

Hydrogen, H2 0.8773

Methane, CH4 0.1142

Ethylene, C2H4 0.0085

Flow rate = 593.660 kmol/hr

Temperature = -127oC

Pressure = 3200kPa

11.2.1 Key Components

Ethylene, C2H2 and Methane, CH4 are considered as the key components. The light key

component shall be methane, CH4 and the heavy key component shall be ethylene, C2H2.

Hence: Ethylene, C2H2 – Heavy key (HK)

Methane, CH4 – Light key (LK)

174
11.2.2 Minimum number of stages

Assuming constant relative volatility, the minimum number of stages is thus estimated by

the FENSKE equation:

 x D , LK x B , HK 
ln  
 x B , LK x D , HK 
N min   1
ln  LK , HK

Nnim = Minimum number of stages

XB, LK = mole fraction of the light key component in the bottoms product

XD, LK = mole fraction of the light key component in the distillate

XB, HK = mole fraction of the heavy key component in the bottoms product

XD, HK = mole fraction of the heavy key component in the distillate

αLK, HK = relative volatility of the light key component with respect to the heavy key

component

From the stream composition tables above,

XB, LK = 0.0008 XD, LK = 0.114 XB, HK = 0.56 XD, HK = 0.0085

Table 11.4: Determining αLK, HK

Temp. Vap. Pressure, methane (Pmeth) Vap. Pressure, ethylene (Pethyl) Pmeth/ Pethyl

175 K 1573.072 Pa 813.309 Pa 1.93

200 K 2018.18 Pa 1096.51 Pa 1.84

230 K 2555.48 Pa 1434.98 Pa 1.78

253 K 2969.00 Pa 1696.86 Pa 1.75

175
Pmrthane 1.93  1.84  1.78  1.75
Realize that,  LK , HK  and Average  LK , HK   1.83
Pethylene 4

 0.114 0.56 
ln  
0.0008 0.0085 
 
ln 9388.2353
Therefore, N min 1  1
ln  LK , HK ln 1.83

N min  15.14  1  14.14  14

Hence, the minimum number of theoretical stages is 14.

11.2.3 Minimum reflux ratio

The Underwood‟s first equation is used to determine the minimum reflux ratio. It is given

by

V  x
Rm  1    i , HK D ,i
D i  i , HK 

Where:

αi, HK is the relative volatility of a component i, with respect to the heavy key component at

feed conditions

xd, I is the mole fraction of a component i, in the distillate

Rm is the minimum reflux ratio

 i xi , f
Θ is the root of the equation  
 1 q
i

176
Table 11.5: Determining θ

Component Xi,f αi, HK αi, HK Xi,f Try θ = 1.75 Try θ = 2.2 Try θ = 2.21

Methane 0.046 2.37 0.11 0.18 0.65 0.68

Ethane 0.222 1.33 0.30 -0.71 -0.345 -0.34

Propane 0.040 0.18 0.0072 -0.0046 -0.0036 -0.0036

Hydrogen 0.350 345.86 121.05 0.35 0.35 0.35

Acetylene 0.002 0.40 0.0008 -0.0006 -0.00044 -0.00044

Ethylene 0.340 1.00 0.340 -0.45 -0.283 -0.28

∑ = -0.64 ∑ = 0.367 ∑ = 0.406

Since ∑ = 0.407 is close enough to 0.4, θ = 2.21

Table 11.6: Determining Rm

Component XD,i αi,HK S = αi,HK - θ T = αi,HK XD,i T/S

Methane 0.1142 2.37 0.16 0.27 1.68

Ethane - 1.33 -0.88 - -

Propane - 0.18 -2.03 - -

Hydrogen 0.8773 345.86 343.65 303.423 0.88

Acetylene - 0.40 -1.81 - -

Ethylene 0.0085 1.00 -1.21 0.0085 -0.007

177
V  i , HK x D,i
 Rm  1    1.68  0.88  0.007  2.55  Rm  2.55  1  1.55
D i  i , HK 

Optimum reflux ratio (R) is given by R  1.5 1.55  2.33

R 2.33
For R = 2.19,   0.70
R  1 2.33  1.00

N min  R 
Erbar-Maddox correlation (Erbar and Maddox, 1961) is given by:  f 
N  R  1
14
From the Erbar-Maddox plot, N min  0.62 and hence N  22.6  23
N 0.62

The minimum reflux ratio is 1.46; the actual reflux ratio is 2.33; the minimum number of

theoretical stages is 14, and the actual number of theoretical stages is therefore 23.

11.2.4 Number of Real Stages

Using a column efficiency of 60 per cent and taking the reboiler as equivalent to one stage,

23 - 1
the number of real stages is given as Number of real stages   37
0.6

Note that the number of plates is same as the number of real stages.

11.2.5 Location of feed plate

KIRKBRIDE‟S equation is used for the estimation of the number of plates above and

below the feed plate and hence to locate the feed stage. The equation is given by:
0.206
N R  xF , HK  B
2
 xB , LK
   
N S  xF , LK  x
 D , HK
 D

 

Where:

B = molar flow rate of bottom product, D = molar flow rate of top product

178
XF, HK = mole fraction of the heavy key component in the feed

XF, LK = mole fraction of the light key component in the feed

XB, LK = mole fraction of the light key component in the bottoms product

XD, LK = mole fraction of the light key component in the distillate product

NR = number of theoretical stages in the rectifying section

NS = number of theoretical stages in the stripping section

0.206
N R  x F , HK  B
2 0.206
 x B , LK  0.34  0.0008  2  894.434 
Therefore,           
N S  x F , LK  x
 D , HK
 D
  0.046  0.0085   593.660 
 

 7.39130.0088581.50664
NR
  0.62
0.206

NS

Solving N R  0.62 N S and N R  N S  23 simultaneously gives:

N S  14.20  14 N R  8.80  9

14.20
The number of plates in the rectifying section =  23.67  24
0.6

8.80  1
The number of plates in the stripping section =  13
0.6

Hence, feed enters the column at the 24th tray from the top.

11.3 Vapour/liquid desities & Vapour/liquid Flowrates

Vapour and liquid flow rates at the top of the column

179
Material balance around the splitter as in figure 2 gives: V  L  D

Where

V = Vapour flow rates at the top of the column, L = Liquid flow rates at the top of the

column

D = Distillate flow rate

L
Again, R 
D

V
Solving equations (6) and (7) simultaneously yields:  R 1
D

Where R = reflux ratio

Having found that R = 2.19 and D = 593.660 kmol/hr;

V  593.6602.19  1  1893.78kmol / hr

L  V  D  1893.78  593.660  1300.12kmol / hr

Therefore vapour and liquid rates at the top of the column are 1893.78kmol/hr and

1300.12kmol/hr respectively.

11.3.1 Vapour and liquid density at the top

At top of the column conditions (30bar and 175 K), the following are attained:

 vap  2.06kg / m 3  liq  221.67kg / m 3

Vapour and liquid flow rates at the bottom of the column

180
The contribution of the feed stream to the internal flow of liquid is described by the

equation below:

L‟ = L + qF V‟ = V – (1 – q) F

Where:

L‟ = liquid flow rate at the bottom of the column

V‟ = vapour flow rate at the bottom of the column

 L'  1300.12  (0.6)1488.094  2192.98kmol / hr

 V '  1893.78  (1  0.6)1488.094  1298.54kmol / hr

11.3.2 Vapour and liquid density at the bottom

At bottom of the column conditions (30bar and 253 K)

 vap  1.43kg / m 3  liq  433.20kg / m 3

Condenser and re-boiler heat duties

Assumptions:

 kinetic and potential energy terms are negligible

 work terms are negligible

Balances around the Condenser

Condenser mass balance is

V=L+D

Condenser energy balance is


181
V hV + QC = DhD + L hL

Where: hV = enthalpy of vapour at the top of column = 4694.491 KJ/kgmol

V = vapour flow rate = 1893.78 kgmol/hr

QC = condenser duty

D = flow rate of distillate = 593.660 kgmol/hr

hD = enthalpy of distillate = 7662.846 kJ/kgmol

L = flow rate of liquid at the top of the column = 1300.12 kgmol/hr

hL = enthalpy of liqiud at the top of the column = -517480.041 kJ/kgmol

Qc  593.6607662.846  1300.12 517480.041  1893.784694.491  677127MJ / hr

QR = V‟ hV + B hB – L‟ hL

Where:

QR = reboiler heat duty hL = enthalpy of liquid at bottom = -5488.954 kJ/kgmol

hV = the enthalpy of vapour at bottom = -5488.954 kJ/kgmol

hB = enthalpy of bottom product = 1446.39 kJ/kgmol

L‟ = flow rate of liquid at the bottom of the column = 2192.98 kgmol/hr

V‟= flow rate of vapour at the bottom = 1298.54 kgmol/hr

B = flow of bottoms = 894.434 kmol/hr

QR  1298.54 5488.954  894.4341446.39  2192.98 5488.954  6203MJ / hr

182
11.4 Determination of liquid-vapour flow factor, FLV at the bottom and top

The liquid-vapour flow factor, FLV is given by:

Lw V
FLV  (R.K Sinnot, 1986)
Vw L

Where:

Lw = liquid flow-rate Vw = vapour flow-rate

2192.98 1.43
 FLV , bottom   0.097  0.10
1298.54 433.20

1300.12 2.06
 FLV , top   0.06618  0.07
1893.78 221.67

Therefore, the liquid-vapour flow factor at the bottom and top are 0.10 and 0.07

respectively.

11.5 Determination of flooding velocity at the top and bottom

The flooding velocity can be estimated from the correlation given by Fair (1961):

K1 (  L  V ) 0.5
uf =
V 0.5

Where:

uf = is the flooding vapour velocity in m/s or maximum permissible velocity based on the

net column cross-sectional area

K1 = empirical constant V = vapour density

183
 L = liquid density

From fig. 11.27 (R.K. Sinnot, 1986), and using a plate spacing of 0.5m at bottom and top

and their respective flow factors:

K1= 8 x 10-2 ………………………………………….…….bottom

K1 = 8.5 x 10-2 …………………………………………….top

11.5.1 Surface tensions:

Bottom surface tension = 0.045 N/m Top surface tension = 0.022 N/m

At these surface tensions, the K1 values are correlated as follows:

0.2
 0.045 
K1 = 0.08    0.094 ……………………………………………………..bottom
 0.02 

0.2
 0.022 
K1 = 0.085    0.094 ……………………………………………………….top
 0.02 

Hence,

0.094(433.20  1.43) 0.5


Bottom uf =  1.63m / s
1.430.5

0.094(221.67  2.06) 0.5


Top uf =  0.99m / s
2.06 0.5

The flooding condition fixes the upper limit of the vapour velocity. A high vapour velocity

is needed for high plate efficiencies, and the velocity will normally be between 70 to 90 per

cent of that which will cause flooding. For design, a value of 80 to 85 per cent should be

used. (R.K. Sinnot, 1986)


184
Hence design for 85 per cent flooding at maximum flow rate (uf) will be:

Bottom uf = 1.63 x 0.85 = 1.39 m/s

Top uf = 0.99 x 0.85 = 0.84 m/s

Maximum volumetric flow rate

The maximum volumetric flow rate can be calculated from the correlation,

V
ύ  ………………………………………………………………………..(10)
V

Where V = vapour flow rate, kg/s

V = vapour density, kg/m3

ύ = maximum volumetric vapour flow rate

1298.54  20.80
Bottom ύ   5.25m 3 / s
1.43  3600

1893.78  3.82
Top ύ   0.98m 3 / s
2.06  3600

Net Area Required

The net area required can be estimated from the equation:

A = ύ/ uf

Where: A = net area ύ = maximum volumetric flow rate

uf = maximum flooding flow rate

5.25 0.98
Bottom A   3.78m 2 Top A   1.2m 2
1.39 0.84
185
11.5.2 Column Cross-sectional Area

Downcomer area is taken as 12 per cent of total and hence, column cross-sectioned area is

calculated as follows:

3.78 1.2
Bottom =  4.3m 2 Top =  1.4m 2
0.88 0.88

11.5.3 Column diameter

The column diameter is determined by:

A 4
D Where A = column cross-sectional area

4.3  4 1.4  4
Bottom D  2.34m Top D  1.34m
 

Liquid flow pattern

LB
Maximum volumetric liquid rate: ύL =
L

Where: LB = liquid rate, kg/s ρL= liquid density

2192.98  20.80
Bottom ύL   2.9  10 2 m 3 / s
3600  433.20

1300.12  3.82
Top ύL   6.22  10 3 m 3 / s
3600  221.67

The plate diameter is within the range of Figure 11.28 (R.K. Sinnot, 1986) and it is clear

from the flow pattern that a single pass plate can be used for both the top and the bottom.

186
11.6 Height of column, H

For safe operations

 0.1m is added to the top tray

 0.3m is taken as the spacing between the draw off tray and the bottom of the

product. (Coulson et al, 1983)

Hence, height of column = (number of plates x plate spacing) + 0.4 m = (37 x 0.5) + 0.4 =

19 m

Table 11.7 Summary of Property Values Used

Parameter Enriching Section Stripping Section


Liquid flow rate, kmol/hr 1300.12 2192.98

Vapour flow rate, kmol/hr 1893.78 1298.54

Liquid density, kg/m3 221.67 433.20

Vapour density, kg/m3 2.06 1.43

Surface tension, N/m 0.022 0.045

Liquid-Vapour flow factor 0.07 0.10

Flooding Velocity, m/s 0.84 1.39

Maximum volumetric rate, m3/s 0.98 5.25

187
Table 11.8: Summary of Demethanizer Design Specifications

Parameter Enriching Section Stripping Section


Temperature, oC -98 -20

Pressure, kPa 3000 3000

Number of trays 24 13

Column diameter, m 1.34 2.34

Parameter Overall Column Value

Optimum reflux ratio, R 2.33

Location of feed tray 24th tray from the top

Height, m 19

Condenser Heat Duty, QC, (MJ/h) -677127

Reboiler Heat Duty, QR, (MJ/h) -6203

11.6.1 Weir height

. For columns operating above atmospheric pressure, the weir heights will normally be

between 40-90mm; 40-50mm is recommended, (R.K. Sinnot, 1986).

Since the column is operated at about 30 atm, weir height (hw) of 50mm is used.

Tray area

Downcomer area Ad  0.12  Ac  0.12  1.4  0.2m 2 , at 12 per cent

Net area, An  Ac  Ad  1.4  0.2  1.2m 2

Active area, Aa  Ac  2 Ad  1.4  20.2  1.0m 2

Hole area, Ah  0.1Aa  0.1m 2

188
11.6.2 Weir Length

Ad 0.17
From Fig.11.31 (R.K. Sinnot, 1986),  100%   100%  12% corresponds to
Ac 1.4

lw
 0.76
Dc

Where lw is the weir length

Weir length = D C  0.76  1.34  0.76  1.02m

Take: Hole diameter = 3 mm Plate thickness = 3 mm

11.6.3 Check Weeping

The hole area must be chosen so that at the lowest operating rate the vapour flow velocity is

still and well above the weep point.

Maximum liquid rate = Liquid density, kg/m3 x Maximum volumetric liquid rate, m3/s


Maximum liquid rate = 221.67  6.22  10 3  1.38kg / s 

Minimum liquid rate, at 70 per cent turn-down = 0.7  1.38  0.97kg / s

2/3
 L 
Weir crest is given by: hw  750 w 
  Llw 

For maximum weir crest, maximum liquid rate is used:

2/3
 1.38 
hw  750  25mm liquid
 221.67  1.02 

For minimum weir crest, minimum liquid rate is used:

189
2/3
 0.97 
hw  750  19mm liquid
 221.67  1.02 

At minimum rate, hw + h w = 50 + 19 = 69 mm

From the weep-point correlation Eduljee (1959), Fig. 11.30 (R K Sinnot), K2 = 30.4

Minimum vapour velocity through the holes at weep point is given by:

uˆ h min  
K 2  0.9025.4  d h   30.4  0.9025.4  3  6.3  6m / s
 v 0.5 2.06 0.5

minimum vapour rate 0.7  0.98


Actual minimum vapour velocity =   6.86  7m / s
Ah 0.1

This implies that the minimum operating rate is well above the weep point, and hence no

weeping occurs.

11.7 Plate pressure drop

0.98
Dry plate drop: Maximum vapour velocity through holes: uˆ h   9.8  10m / s
0.1

The pressure drop through the dry plate can be estimated using expressions derived for flow

2
 uˆ  
through orifices given as: hd  51 h  V
 CO   L

Where the orifice coefficient CO is a function of the plate thickness, hole diameter and the

hole to perforated area ratio.

From discharge coefficient (CO) plot, fig 11.34 (R.K Sinnot, 1986), Liebson et al, (1957),

for plate thickness/hole diameter =1 and Ah/Ap  Ah /Aa = 0.1, CO = 0.84.

190
2
 10  2.06
Hence hd can be estimated as: hd  51  67mm liquid
 0.84  221.67

Residual head

Methods have been proposed for estimating the residual head as a function of liquid surface

tension, froth density, and froth height. However as this correction term is small the use of

an elaborate method for estimation is not justified and the simple equation proposed by

Hunt et al (1957) can be used. (R.K.Sinnot 1986)

12.5  10 3 12.5  10 3
hr    56mm liquid
L 221.67

11.7.1 Total plate pressure drop, ht

ht  hd  hw  hw   hr  67  50  19  56  192mm liquid

Downcomer liquid back-up

Downcomer pressure loss; assume the height of apron, hap = hw – 10 = 40mm

Then area under apron, Aap = lw x hap = 1.02 x 0.04 = 0.041 m2

As this is less than Ad = 0.17 m2, the head loss in the downcomer, hdc can be estimated

using the equation given by Cicalese et at, (1947)

2
 L 
hdc  166 wd 
  L Am 

Where: Lwd = Liquid flow rate in the downcomer, kg/s

Am = either the downcomer area Ad or the clearance area under the downcomer Aap;

whichever is smaller, m2

191
2
 1.38 
hdc  166  3.83  4mm
 221.67  0.041

Back-up in Downcomer

In terms of clear liquid the downcomer back-up, hb, is given by:

hb   hw  how   ht  hdc ...................................................................................(21)

hb  hw  hw   ht  hdc  50  19  192  4  265mm  0.27m

0.22 
1
plate spacing  weir height  and hence the tray spacing is acceptable.
2

11.7.2 Check residence time

A time of at least 3 seconds is recommended.

Ad hb  L 0.17  0.27  221.67


Downcomer residence time is given by: t r   tr   7.4s
Lwd 1.38

The residence time, tr = 7.4s is well above 3 seconds and hence indicative of a satisfactory

result.

11.7.3 Check Entrainment

As a rough guide the upper limit of can be taken as 0.1; below this figure the effect on

efficiency will be small.

The percentage flooding is given by:

u v actual velocity based on net area 


Percentage flooding 
uf
192
maximum volumetric flow 0.98
uv    0.82m / s
net area 1.2

0.82
Percentage flooding =  0.83  83% FLV = 0.07
0.99

From Fig. 11.29 (R.K. Sinnot, 1986), fractional entrainment, = 0.04 which is less than the

upper limit of 0.1, hence satisfactory.

Perforated Area

Using the cartridge-type construction, assume: 50 mm unperforated strip round plate edge;

lw
50 mm wide calming zones. From Fig. 11.32 (Sinnot, 1986) and at  0.76 , c  99 0
Dc

Where θc = angle subtended by chord

Angle subtended at plate edge by unperforated strip = 180  99  810

Mean length, unperforated edge strips = 1.34  50  10 3  


81
 1.82m
180

Area of unperforated edge strips = 50  10 3 1.82  0.091m 2

Mean length of calming zone, approximate = weir length + width of unperforated strip

= 1.02 + 50 x 10-3 = 1.07 m

Area of calming zones = 2 (1.07 x 50 x 10-3) = 0.107 m2

Total area for perforations, Ap = 1.0 – (0.107 + 0.091) = 0.802 m2

193
Hole Pitch

The hole pitch (distance between the hole centres) lp should not be less than 2.0 hole

diameters, and the normal range will be 2.5 to 4.0 diameters. Square and equilateral

triangular patterns are used; triangular is used in this design.

2
A d 
For an equilateral triangular pitch: h  0.9 h 
Ap  l p 

2
0.1 3 0.9  32  0.802
Where lp denotes the hole pitch   0.9   l p   8.06mm
0.802  l p  0.1

lp = 8.06 mm is in the range 2.5 – 4.0 hole diameter and hence a satisfactory result.

  dh2   3  10 3 
2

Area of one hole =   7.06858  10 6 m 2 Number of holes =


4 4

hole area 0.1


  14147.113  14148
area of one hole 7.06858  10 6

11.8 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING DESIGN

Design pressure

From the chemical design analysis, the design pressure is taken as 10% of the operating

pressure.

10
  3000  300kPa
100

Hence, the design pressure = 3000 kPa + 300 kPa = 3300 kPa

194
Design temperature

The strength of the materials decreases with temperature. The maximum operational

temperature used was -20oC (253 K). For design purposes, a tolerance of about 20oC is

allowed. The maximum operational temperature could therefore be pegged at 0oC (273 K).

For carbon and low alloy steel, a minimum allowance of 2.0mm should be used. (R.K.

Sinnot). Where more corrosion is expected a minimum of 4mm is allowed.

Wall thickness

If Di is internal diameter; e the minimum thickness required; f the design stress and Pi the

internal pressure, then:

Pi Di
e
2 f  Pi

Design stress (f) for carbon steel at the design temperature is 135 N/mm2 = 135000 kPa

(Table 13.2, Sinnot, 1993)

At bottom of the column, minimum thickness required is:

3000  2.34
e  0.026  26mm
2135000  3000

At top of the column, minimum thickness required is:

3000  1.34
e  0.015  15mm
2135000  3000

Adding corrosion allowance: Bottom = 26 mm + 2 mm = 28 mm plate

Top = 15 mm + 2 mm = 17 mm plate

195
11.8.2 Thickness of Head

Using a “standard” ellipsoidal head at the top,

Pi Di 3000  1.34
e   0.015  15mm
2 Jf  0.2 Pi 2  1  135000  0.2  3000

3000  2.34
At the bottom, e   0.026  26mm
2  1 135000  0.2  3000

Adding corrosion allowance: Bottom = 26 mm + 2 mm = 28 mm plate

Top = 15 mm + 2 mm = 17 mm plate

Conical Section

With Dc as the diameter of the cone at a point and α as half the cone apex angle which from

geometry is found to be 8.7o;

Thickness at top of the knuckle,

Pi Dc 1 30001.34 1
ek      0.0152  15.2mm
2 fJ  Pi cos  2135000  3000 cos 8.7

At the bottom,

30002.34 1
ek    0.0263  26.3mm
2135000  3000 cos 8.7

Adding the corrosion allowance: Bottom = 26.3 mm + 2 mm = 28.3 mm

Top = 15.2 mm + 2 mm = 17.2 mm

Length of thicker section

The length of the thicker section Lk depends on the cone angle and is given by:

196
Di 2.34
Lk    0.77m
4 cos  4 cos 8.7

Weight of shell

According to Sinnot, 1993, the approximate weight of the column, Wv is given by:

Wv  240Cv Dm H c  0.8Dm  t

Where:

Wv = Total weight of column excluding internal fittings such as plates

Cv = a factor to account for the weight of nozzle, manways and plate support ring or

equivalent fittings and it is equal to 1.15 for distillation columns. (R.K sinnot, 1993)

Hc = height of cylindrical section

t = wall thickness

Dm = mean diameter of column = t + diameter of column

Since the column diameter at the top is different from that at the bottom, the total weight of

the column is determined as below:

Total weight of shell = weight of bottom + weight of top

weight of top  240Cv Dm H c  0.8Dm  t  240  1.15  1.35712.1  0.81.357 0.017  84kN

weight of bottom  240  1.15  2.3686.9  0.82.368 0.028  161kN

Total weight of column = 161kN  84kN  245kN

197
Weight of Plate

Since the plate diameter at top is different from that the bottom, the weight of the plates is

determined as shown below:

Weight of plates = weight of plates at the top + weight of plates at the bottom

Weight of plates at the top = 1.2 kN x 1.4 x 24= 40.32 kN

Weight of plates at the bottom = 1.2 kN x 4.3 x 13= 67.08 kN

Total weight of plates = 40.32 + 67.08 = 107.4 kN

Weight of insulation

Mineral wool is used for the insulation because it is relatively cheap and also widely used

for insulating distillation columns (Nelson, 1963).

Density of mineral wool = 130kg/m3 (Nelson, 1993)

Thickness of insulation = 75mm (Nelson, 1993)

Approximate volume of insulation

 1.34 12.1 75 10 3    2.34  6.9  75 10 3  7.6m3

Weight of insulation = 7.6 x 130 x 9.81 = 9692 N

The weight of insulation is doubled to allow for attachment of fittings and moisture

absorption. (Nelson, 1963)

Therefore weight of insulation together with fittings is taken as: 2 x 9692 = 19384 N

Total weight = weight of shell + weight of plates + insulation weight

= 245 + 107.4 + 19.38 = 371.78 kN

198
Wind Loading

Take dynamic wind pressure as 1280 N/m2

Mean diameter, including insulation (using average diameter and average thickness)

Mean diameter = 1.84 + 2(23 + 75) x 10-3 = 2.04 m

Loading (per linear metre) Fw = 1280 x 2.04 = 2611 N/m

2611
Bending moment at bottom M x   19 2  471285.5 Nm
2

Analysis of Stresses

Pressure stresses

PDi
The longitudinal stress is given by:  h 
2t

Where:  h = longitudinal stress P = Design pressure = 3000 kPa

Di = internal diameter (avg.) of column = 1.84 m

t = wall thickness (avg.) = 23 mm = 0.023 m

PDi 3000  1.84


h    120000kPa  120 N / mm2
2t 2  0.023

The circumference stress is also calculated from the relation:

PDi 3000  1.84


L    60000kPa  60 N / mm 2
4t 4  0.023

Dead weight stress

199
The stress due to the weight of the vessel and the attachments are referred to as the dead

weight stress and is calculated as follows:

W
w  , where W is the total weight of the column
 Di  t t

371.78
w   2761.8kN / m  2.77 N / mm 2
 1.84  0.0230.023

Bending Stress

As a result of bending moments on the column, the column would definitely be subjected to

bending stress. The bending stress will be compressive or tensile, depending on the location

and it is given by:

M  Di 
b    t
Iv  2 

Where: M = total bending moment at the plane being considered

Iv = second moment of the area of the vessel about the plane of bending and it is given by:

Iv 

64
D o
4
 Di
4

Do =1.84 + 2 x 0.023 = 1.886 m = 1886 mm


Iv 
64
1.886 4

 1.84 4  0.0584m 4  5.84  1010 mm 4

471285500  1840 
b   10 
 23   7.6 N / mm 2
5.84  10  2 

The longitudinal stress is:  z   L   w   b , w is compressive and therefore negative.


200
 z (upwind)  60  2.77  7.6  64.83N / mm2

 z (downwind)  60  2.77  7.6  49.63N / mm2

As there is no torsional shear stress, the principal stresses will be z, and h.

The greatest difference between the principal stresses will be on the down-wind side.

Thus 120 – 49.63 = 70.37 N/mm2.

The value is well below the allowable design stress of 115 N/mm2 and hence satisfactory.

Elastic Stability

The critical buckling stress c is given by:

 t 
  2  10 4 
23 
 c  2  10 4    244 N / mm
2

 Do   1886 

The maximum compressive stress will occur when the vessel is not under pressure.

Thus maximum compressive stress = 2.77 + 7.6 = 10.37 N/mm2 and this value is well

above the critical and hence acceptable.

Column Supports

The supports must be designed to carry the weight of the vessel and contents, and any

superimposed loads such as wind loads. Supports should also be designed to allow easy

access to the vessel and fittings for inspection and maintenance. The height of the skirt is

usually between 2-3m. For this design a height of 2m is used.

In this design, a straight cylindrical skirt (θs = 90o) is adopted. The material of construction

shall be carbon steel.


201
Skirt thickness

The skirt thickness must be sufficient to withstand the dead-weight loads and bending

moments imposed on it by the vessel; it will not be under the vessel pressure.

The resultant stresses in the skirt will be:  s (tensile)   bs   ws

 s (compressive)   bs   ws

4M s
Where = bending stress in the skirt =
 Ds  t s t s Ds
bs

W
= dead weight stress in the skirt =
 Ds  t s t s Ds
ws

Where:

Ms = maximum bending moments evaluated at the base of the base of the skirt

W = total weight of the vessel and its contents

Ds = inside diameter of the skirt at the base

ts = skirt thickness

The maximum dead weight load on the skirt would occur when the column is full of the

feed in liquid form at top and bottom conditions.

   
Approximate weight =   1.34 2  12.1  221.67  9.81    2.34 2  6.9  433.20  9.81
4  4 

Approximate weight = 163211.20 N = 163.21 kN

202
Total weight = weight of column + approximate weight of content =371.78+163.2 =535 kN

Wind loading = 2.61 kN

212
Using a skirt height of 2 m, bending moment at the base of skirt, 2.61   575.50kNm
2

As a first trial, take skirt thickness to be 20 mm

163.21  10 3
 ws (test)   1.40 N / mm 2
 1840  2020

371.78  10 3
 ws (operating)   3.18 N / mm 2
 1840  2020

Maximum ˆ s (compressive)  10.7  1.4  9.3N / mm2

Maximum ˆ s (tensile)  10.7 - 3.18  7.52 N / mm2

Take the joint factor, J as 1.0

Criteria for design:

f s J sin  135  1 sin 90  135N / mm2

 135N / mm2 is greater than the maximum stress (tensile) = 7.52 N/mm
2
f s J sin

t 
 sin  0.125  200000
20 
0.125E  s  sin 90  271.8 N / mm
2

 Ds   1840 

203
t 
0.125E  s  sin  271.8 N / mm 2 and is greater than the maximum stress (compressive)
 Ds 

Both criteria are satisfied, adding 2 mm for corrosion gives a skirt thickness of 22 mm.

Base ring and anchor bolts

The anchor bolts are assumed to share the overturning load equally, and the bolt area
required is given by:

1  4M s 
Ab    W 
N b f b  Db 

Where:

Ab = area of one bolt at the root of the thread

Nb = number of bolts

Fb = maximum allowable bolt stress also equal to the design stress

Ms = bending moments at the base

Db = bolt circle diameter

Mean diameter of column including insulation = 1.84 + 2(0.023 + 0.075) = 2.04 m

Circumference of bolt diameter = 2040π

According to Scheiman (1963), bolt spacing should not be less than 600mm and the total

number of bolts should be in multiples of 4.

2040
Number of bolts required at minimum bolt spacing =  11
600

Per the specifications, the number of bolts at minimum spacing = 12

Assume bolt diameter = 3.2m

204
Number of bolts = 12

2040
Bolt spacing =  534mm
12

1  4M s  1  4  575.5  10 3 
Ab    W     371.78   752mm 2
N b f b  Db  12  125  2.04 

4  752
Bolt root diameter   31mm

The total compressive load, Fb on the base ring per unit length is given by:

4  575.5  10 3 371.78  10 3
Fb    281  10 3 N / m
  1.84 2
  1.84

Take the bearing pressure as 5 N/mm2

The minimum width of the base ring, Lb is given by:

Fb 1 281  10 3
Lb   3   56.2mm
f c 10 5  10 3

205
Table 11.10: Summary of Mechanical Design for demethanizer

Parameter Value

Weight of shell, kN 245

Weight of plates, kN 107.4

Weight of insulating material, kN 19.38

Total weight, kN 371.78

Critical buckling stress, N/mm2 244

Maximum stress (compressive), N/mm2 10.37

Resultant longitudinal stress (upwind), N/mm2 64.83

Resultant longitudinal stress (downwind), N/mm2 49.63

Circumferential stress, N/mm2 60

Dead weight stress, N/mm2 2.77

Skirt height, m 2

Skirt thickness, mm 22

Number of bolts 12

Bolt area, mm2 752

Bolt root diameter, mm 31

206
CHAPTER 12

12.0 DESIGN OF DEETHANIZER

12.1 Problem statement

Design a distillation column (de-ethanizer) to separate C2s from C3s with propane and

ethylene as the main bottom product at a rate of 62.0737 kmol/hr at 40ºC and ethane,

methane, acetylene and ethylene as distillate at a rate of 832.3602kmol/hr at -34.95 °C

operating at 3000kPa.

12.1.1 Material balance

The material balance over the distillation unit has been prepared on the basis given in

chapter 4; thus in sub-section 4.9.

12.1.2 Calculation of vapour pressure and relative volatility

The relative volatility is taken as the geometric mean of the values at the column top and

bottom temperatures.

°
α ° , ....................................................................................................................................1

where,

PºA = vapour pressure of heavier key component (propane).

PºB = vapour pressure of lighter key component (ethylene).

= Relative volatility.

207
Table 12.1 Vapour pressure and relative volatility of propane and ethylene

Temperature (K) Vapour Pressure of Vapour Pressure of Relative volatility

C3H8 (Pa) C2H4(Pa)

248.05 2.2608×106 3.7808×106 1.6723

313 3.3714×106 7.2785×106 2.1592

Average relative volatility =α

12.1.3 q-line calculation

,..............................................................................................................................2

HV is the enthalpy of feed at dew point.

HL is the enthalpy of feed at boiling point.

HV is the enthalpy of feed at entering conditions.

12.1.4 Number of ideal plates

Assuming constant relative volatility, the number of ideal plates at total reflux can be

estimated by the FENSKE equation:

Where:

Nmin = Minimum number of ideal plates

208
xB = mole fraction of bottom product

LK and HK denote lighter component and heavy component respectively

xD = mole fraction of distillate

α = relative volatility of the two component

Nmin =

Nmin =

Therefore the minimum number of stages, Nmin = 21

12.1.5 Minimum and optimum reflux ratio analysis

α
,……………..……………………………………………………………………4
α θ

where , = the relative volatility of component i with respect to some reference component,

usually the heavy key,

Rm = the minimum reflux ratio,

xD = concentration of component i in the tops at minimum reflux

and θ is the root of the equation:

α
, ……………………………………………………………………….5
α θ

xF = the concentration of component i in the feed, and q depends on the condition of the

feed.

209
But,

= -1 = 1.75597

Most columns are designed to operate between 1.2 and 1.5 times the minimum reflux ratio

because this is approximately the region of minimum operating cost.

The Erbar-Maddox correlation which gives the ratio of number of stages required to the

number at total reflux, as a function of the reflux ratio, with the minimum reflux ratio as a

parameter was used here. Estimates of the number of stages at total reflux and the minimum

reflux ratio gives

Hence the number of plates is therefore 36.

For plate/tray efficiency, Eo = 0.59×100 = 59%

210
12.1.6 Feed stage location

By the feed stage location is given by;

, ...............................................................................................5

Where;

NR = number of stages above the feed, including any partial condenser,

NS = number of stages below the feed, including the reboiler,

B = molar flow bottom product,

D = molar flow top (distillate) product,

XF, MK =concentration of the heavy key in the feed,

XF, LK = concentration of the light key in the feed,

XD, HK = concentration of the heavy key in the top product,

XB, LK = concentration of the light key if in the bottom product.


0.206
N R  0.0666  0.04035  62.0737 
2

    
N S  0.56  0.0000072  832.3602 

= 4.552196 .........................................................................................................................6

........................................................................................................................7

Solving equation A and B simultaneously,

NR = 6.484 = 7 and NS = 29

211
Therefore the number of plates below the feed is 29. Hence the feed plate is at the 28th

plate from the top.

12.1.7 Height of tower, H

The height of tower is given is given by,

– , ……………………………………………………………………………8

Where;

N = Number of trays

Ts = tray spacing ( 0.6 m is specified)

Kd = safety factor = 1.3

H = (36-1) 0.6×1.3 = 27.3 = 27m.

12.1.8 Vapour and liquid rates at the top of the column

Material balance around the first tray of the column and the condenser gives:

……………………………………………………………………………….9

Where V and L are vapour and liquid rates at the top of the column

D = Distillate or top product

Now

Where:

212
R = reflux ratio

=2.1072+1=3.1072, but D = 857.2043kmol

V = 3.1072×857.2043 =2663.5052kmol/hr

Also /hr

Therefore vapour and liquid rate at the top of the column are 2663.5052kmol/hr and

1806.3892kmol/hr respectively.

12.1.9 Vapour and liquid rates at the bottom of the column

Assume a constant molal overflow at the bottom of the column, the total material balance

gives:

LB = VB +B……………………………………………………………………………….11

Where:

LB = liquid rate at the bottom of the column

VB = vapour rate at the bottom of the column

B = bottom product

F= feed rate

But

LB = L + F…………………………………………………….………………………….12

LB = 1806.3892 + 894.434 = 2700.8232kmol/hr

213
VB = 2700.8232 - 62.07372 = 2638.7495kmol/hr

Therefore liquid and vapour rate at the bottom of the column are 2700.8232kmol/hr and

2638.7495kmol/hr respectively.

12.1.10 Balances around entire column

Steady state energy balance around the entire column:

FhF + QC + QR = DhD + BhB……………………………………………………………..13

Assumptions:

 kinetic and potential energy terms are negligible

 work terms are negligible

12.1.11 Balances Around the Condenser

Condenser mass balance is

V = L + D, ……………………………………………………………………………….14

Condenser energy balance is

V HV + QC = DHD + LHL…………………………………………... ……………………15

Where:

HV = enthalpy of vapour at the top of column = -5468.588kJ/kgmol

V = vapour flow rate = 2663.5052kmol/hr

QC = condenser duty

D = flow rate of distillate = 832.3602kgmol/hr

214
HD = enthalpy of distillate = -2.405 kJ/kgmol

L = flow rate of liquid at the top of the column = 1806.3892kgmol/hr

HL = enthalpy of liquid at the top of the column = -5468.588kJ/kgmol

QC =DHD + LHL - VHV, …………………………………………………………………16

QC = [1806.3892(-5468.588)]+[ 1806.3892(-2.405 ] - [-5468.588 (2663.5052)]

QC = -195.4954138MJ/hr

From equation (16), QR = DHD + BHB - FHF - QC

Where:

QR = reboiler heat duty

HF = the enthalpy of feed = -6458kJ/kgmol

HD = enthalpy of distillate = -2.405 kJ/kgmol

HB = enthalpy of bottom product = -6458kJ/kgmol

D = flow rate of distillate =832.3602kmol/hr

QC = condenser heat duty = - 617.4183MJ/hr

F = feed flow rate = 894.434kmol/hr

B = flow rate of bottoms = 62.0737kmol/hr

QR =[832.3602(-2.405 )] +[62.0737( - 6458)] - [832.3602( - 6458)] –-195495413.8]

QR = 688.1685452MJ/hr

215
12.1.12 Determination of vapour and liquid density at the top and bottom

From calculations the vapour and liquid density of the column are as shown below

Table 12.2: Vapour and liquid density at the top and bottom

Property Top Bottom

Vapour density (ρV, 434.2564 450.9902

Kg/m3)

Liquid Density (ρL, 460.0943 482.8811

Kg/m3)

12.1.13 Determination of liquid-vapour flow factor, FLV

The liquid-vapour flow factor FLV is given by:

ρ
ρ

Where

Lw = liquid mass flow-rate, kg/s,

Vw = vapour mass flow-rate, kg/s.

FLV at the bottom = = 0.98913

FLV at the top = 0.6782

Therefore, the liquid-vapour factor at the bottom and top are 0.98913 and 0.6566

respectively.

216
12.1.14 Determination of flooding velocity

The flooding velocity can be estimated from the correlation given by [2]:

ρ ρ
,……………………………………………………………...….18
ρ

Where:

uf = is the flooding vapour velocity in m/s or maximum permissible velocity based on

bubbling of active area,

K1 = empirical constant,

V = vapour density

 L = liquid density

Using a plate spacing of 0.6m [1] and the flow factors at the top and bottom; thus

for FLV = 0.98913, K1= 0.035 (bottom) and

for FLV =0.6566, K1 = 0.046 (top)

Corrections for surface tensions:

Bottom surface tension = 0.1333N/m

Top surface tension = 0.000801N/m

Therefore:

Bottom, K1 = = 0.0541

217
Top, K1 = 0.048 0.0252

Hence,

Bottom uf = = 0.0144m/s

Top uf =

The flooding condition fixes the upper limit of the vapour velocity. A high vapour velocity

is needed for high plate efficiencies, and the velocity will normally be between 70 to 90 per

cent of that which will cause flooding. For design, a value of 80 to 85 per cent should be

used. [1]

Hence design for 85 per cent flooding at maximum flow rate (uf) will be:

Bottom uf = 0.0144 0.85 = 0.01224m/s

Top uf =0.00615 0.85 = 0.00523m/s

12.1.15 Maximum volumetric flow rate

The maximum volumetric flow rate can be calculated from the correlation,

ύ ……………………………………………………………………………………..19
ρ

Where V = vapour rate, kg/s

V = vapour density

ύ = maximum volumetric vapour flow rate

Top; ύ
218
Bottom; ύ

12.1.16 Area required

The net area required can be estimated from the equation:

ύ
……….…………………………………………………………………………..20

Where:

AC = column area

ύ = maximum volumetric flow rate

uf = maximum flooding flow rate

Top;

Bottom;

12.1.17 Determination of column diameter, dc

Column diameter:

……………………………………………………………………………21
π

Where:

AC = column area

Top; π

219
Bottom ; π

12.1.18 Liquid flow pattern

Maximum volumetric liquid rate,

ύ …………………………………………………………………………………..22
ρ

Where:

LB = liquid rate at the bottom of the column, kg/s

L= liquid density

Summary of chemical engineering design

Table 12.3: Column Design Specifications

Feed Temperature (0C) 6.005

Feed Pressure (kPa) 3006

Top Pressure (kPa) 3000

Bottom Pressure (kPa) 3000

Reflux Ratio(R) 2.1072

Minimum Reflux Ratio(Rmin) 1.7560

R/Rmin 1.2

Feed Stage 28

220
Minimum number of trays(Nmin) 21

Number of Actual Trays (N) 36

Tray Efficiency 59%

Height of column(m) 27

Condenser Heat Duty, QC, (MJ/h) -195.4954138

Reboiler Heat Duty, QR, (MJ/h) 688.1685452

Column diameter, m top 2.8265

Bottom 3.4584

12.2 Column internal selection, operation and design

The sieve tray is chosen for the purpose of this design because of its efficiency, wide

operating range, and ease of maintenance and cost factors.

12.2.1 Wier height

For columns operating above atmospheric pressure, the weir height will normally be

between 40-90mm; 40-50mm is recommended. Therefore a weir height of 50mm is chosen;

hw = 50mm.

12.2.2 Tray area

The weir height fixes the area of the down comer (Ad).

Net area = Column cross sectional area – Downcomer area.

221
An = Ac –Ad, ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………23

For the top, An = 6.2745 0.075 = 6.1995m2

For the bottom, An = 9.9393 – 0.075 = 9.8643m2

Using , is read from Fig.11.31 [2].

Where;

lw = length of weir

Dc = column diameter

Thus for the top, lw = 2.8265 0.805 = 2.2753m

For the bottom, lw = 3.4584 0.805 = 2.7842m

12.2.3 Hole Diameter (dh)

A preferable hole diameter = 5mm. [2]

12.2.4 Tray thickness (tT)

A preferable tray thickness = 3mm

12.2.5 Active area

, ………………………………………………………………………...24

Thus for the top, Aa = 6.2745 2(0.075) =6.1245m2

For the bottom, Aa = 9.9393 2(0.075) = 9.7893m2

222
12.2.6 Hole area

, ……………………………………………………………………………..25

For the top AH =

For the bottom,

12.2.8 Maximum liquid rate

At the top = 14.4697kg/s

minimum liquid rate at 70% turn down =

At the bottom = 21.3354kg/s

minimum liquid rate at 70% turn down

12.2.9 Weir crest (mmLiquid), how

,…………………………………………………………………………26
ρ

where:

Lw = liquid flow rate, kg/s

Lw = weir lenght weir crest, mm liquid

12.2.10 Maximum how

For the top = 43.1960mm liquid.

For the bottom = 56.71893mm liquid.

223
12.2.11 Minimum how

Top, =34.0546 mm liquid.

Bottom, = 41.1666mm liquid.

Minimum rate =

Top, 50 + 39.0546 =89.0546 mm liquid.

Bottom, 50 + 39.1332 =58.1332 mm liquid.

The weep-point correlation,

K2 of the top is 30.8 and that of the bottom is 30.9 [1]

, .............................................................................................................27
ρ

minimum vapour velocity through the holes at weep point

ρ vapour density

hole diameter

For the top, =0.5970m/s

For the bottom, = 0.6018m/s

Actual minimum vapour velocity =

For the top, = = 24.3853m/s

224
Bottom, = = 22.7953m/s

This means minimum operating rate will be well above weep point.

12.2.12 Plate pressure drop

The total pressure drop is taken as the sum of the pressure drop calculated for the flow of

vapour through the dry plate (i.e. the dry plate drop, hd); the head of the clear liquid on the

plate (i.e. ); and a term to account for other, minor, sources of pressure loss, the

so called residual loss (hr).

ht = ,………………………………………………………………28

12.2.13 Head loss through dry hole

hd = head loss across the dry hole

ρ
, ........................................................................................................29
ρ

where uh =gas velocity through hole area

k1, k2 are constants

For sieve plates

k1 = 0 and

Cv = 0.7419

k2 = 50.8 / 0.74192 = 92.77

For the top, uh = 0.1254m/s

225
Thus mm liquid

For the bottom, uh =0.0502m/s

Hence

12.2.14 Residual Head

The simple equation proposed by Hunt [1] is used.

, ……………………………………………………………………………….30
ρ

For the top, hr = mm liquid

Bottom, hr = mm liquid

Hence ht =117.6008mm liquid for the top and 84.2379mm liquid for the bottom

12.3 Downcomer design

12.3.1 Head loss over downcomer apron

, ..................................................................................................................31
ρ

Take clearance, C = 0.5

liquid flow rate in downcomer kg/s

For the top,

Bottom,

12.3.2 Downcomer liquid back-up

226
In terms of clear liquid the downcomer back-up, hb, is given by:

+ , ………………………………………………………………32

For the top, 89.0546+177.6008+9.8335=276.4889mm liquid

Similarly the bottom is also 164.4842mm liquid.

Since these values are less than the tray spacing of 0.6m there will be no flooding in the

enriching section and stripping sections (bottom and top).

12.3.3 Residence time

Downcomer residence time is given by:

ρ
, …...…………………………........................................................………….33

is the residence time

is clear liquid back up

0 075 460 0943 0 2765


For the top tr = 0.7001sec
13 6275

Similarly that of the bottom is 0.18525sec.

12.3.4 Determination of entrainment

In operation some liquid droplets will be entrained and carried up the column by the vapour

flow, and this will reduce the actual, operating, efficiency. The dry-plate efficiency can be

corrected for the effects of entrainment using the equation proposed by Colbura (1936)[1]:

12.3.5 Estimation of perforated area

227
lw
At 0 805 for the top the and bottom c 91 thus angle subtended at plate edge by
Dc

unperforated strip = 180 – 91 = 89º

12.3.6 Calculation of the Number of Holes

Area of one hole = 1.963 x 10-5m2

0.0148
  753.95  754
Number of holes 1.963  105

Table 12.4 Plate Specifications

Active area, Ac Top 6.1245m2 Length of weir, lw Top 2.2753m

Bottom 9.7893m2 Bottom 2.7842m

Weir height 50mm dh 5mm


Hole diameter,

Downcomer area, Ad 0.075m2 Plate thickness 3mm

Hole area, Ah Top 0.61245m2 Plate pressure drop Top 117.6 mm liquid

Bottom 0.97893m2 Bottom 84.2379 mm liquid

Net area, (An) Top 6.1995m2 Number of holes 754

Bottom 9.8643m2

Plate spacing 0.6m Downcomer area 0.07m2

Plate material carbon steel Downcomer material carbon steel

228
12.4 Mechanical Design

12.4.1 Maximum Design Pressure

Vessels subject to external pressure should be designed to resist the maximum differential

pressure that is likely to occur during operation. From the chemical design analysis, the

design pressure is taken as 10% of atmospheric pressure.

10
3000kPa 300kPa. Hence the design pressure is 300 + 3000 = 3300kPa
100

12.4.2 Design temperature

The strength of materials decreases with temperature. The maximum operational

temperature was -34.95 ºC for the top and 40 ºC for the bottom. For design purposes, a

tolerance is allowed. Hence the maximum operational temperature could therefore be

pegged at -45 ºC for the top and 85 ºC for bottom. [2]

12.4.3 Material for construction

The material selected must be compatible with the process conditions. [1] Carbon steel is

therefore used for the construction.

12.4.4 Design loads

A structure must be designed to resist gross plastic deformation and collapse under all the

conditions of loading. The loads to which a process vessel will be subject in service are

listed below.

The major loads include:

 Design pressure: including any significant static head of liquid.

 Maximum weight of the vessel and content under operating conditions.

229
 Maximum weight of the vessel and contents under hydraulic test conditions.

 Wind loads

12.4.5 Weight Loads

The approximate weight of the column, Wv is given by:

Wv 240Cv Dm Hc 0 8 Dm t ,.......................................................................................34

Where:

W v = Total weight of column or shell; N

Cv = a factor to account for the weight of nozzle, manways and plate support ring or

equivalent fittings and it is equal to 1.15 for distillation columns. [1]

Hc = Column height = 27m

g = acceleration due to gravity = 9.81N/m2

t = wall thickness, mm = 5mm

Dm = mean diameter of column = t + Hc = 0.005 + 2.8265 = 2.827m for the top and

3.4589m for the bottom

Wv 240 1 15 2 827 27 2 827 0 005

21077 83286N for the top and 34763 44462N for the bottom. Therefore total weight of

column =21077.8386 + 34763.444462 = 55.8412831MN.

12.4.6 Weight of plates


π
Plate area = 4 0 62 0 28m2

230
The total weight of a plate are found by multiplying the plate area by 1.2kN/m

 weight of plate = 1.2  0.28 = 0.34kN

Therefore for 36 plates;

Total weight of plates = 36×340 = 12.240kN

12.4.7 Weight of insulation

Mineral wool is used for the insulation because it is relatively cheap and also widely used

for distillation columns.

Density of mineral wool = 130kg/m3

Thickness of insulation = 75mm

Approximate volume of insulation =   0.6  14  0.075  1.98m


3

Weight of insulation = 1.98 130  9.81  2.525kN

The weight of insulation is doubled to allow for attachment of fittings and moisture

absorption.[1]

Therefore weight of insulation together with fittings is taken as 2 × 2525 = 5.050kN

Sum of Weights = weight of shell + weight of plates + insulation weight

= 21.077 + 12.24 + 5.050

= 38.367kN for the top and 52.053kN for the bottom, hence total weight = 90.420kN

12.4.8 Wind loading

Wind pressure for smooth cylindrical columns is estimated from the relation;
231
Pw = 0.05Uw 2,…………………………………………………………………………...35

Pw = wind pressure, N/m2

Uw = wind speed, km/h.

Average Uw = 150km/h [6]. To allow for tolerance, a value of 160km/h will be used.

Pw 0 05 1602 1280N/m2

The load per unit length of the column, Fw, is given by

Fw = Pw Deff, ……………………………………………………………………………..36

Deff = 2.8265 + 2(0.075 + 0.005) = 2.9865mfor the top and 3.6184m for bottom.

Fw 1280 2 9865 3822 72N m for the top and 4426.753N/m for the bottom. Hence

load per unit length of the whole column is 8249.473N/m.

Since the column would be free standing and mounted on skirt supports it would act as a

cantilever under wind loading.

Now for a uniform loaded cantilever, the bending moment at any plane is given by:

Wx2
Mx , ……………………………………………………………………………….37
2

W = load per unit length

x = column height

3822 72 272
Mx =1393381.44Nm for the top and 1613551.469Nm for the bottom
2

12.4.9 Wall thickness

232
To ensure that column is sufficiently rigid to withstand its own weight, a minimum wall

thickness is allowed. For column with diameter between 3-3.5m a minimum thickness of

12mm is required.[2] Since the column diameter is approximately between 3 and 3.5, wall

thickness of 12mm is used.

12.5 Design stress

12.5.1 Primary stress

The longitudinal stress is given by:

PDi
h , ………………………………………………………………………………..38
2t

Where:

h= longitudinal stress, N/m2

P = Design pressure, N/m = 3300kPa

Di= internal diameter of column = 2.8265m for the top and 3.4584m for the bottom.

t = wall thickness = 0.005m

3300 2 8265
h 932745kN m2 for the top and 1141272kN/m2 for the bottom.
2 0 005

The circumference stress is also calculated from the relation:

PDi
L , ………………………………………………………………………………...39
4t

3300 2 8265
L 466372 5kN/m2 for the top and 570636kN/m2 bottoms.
4 0 005

The stress due to the weight of the vessel and the attachments are referred to as the direct

stress, w is calculated as:


233
W
w , ……………………………………………………………………………40
π Di t t

21077 8386
w is weight of the column w 474680.1kN/m2 for the top, similarly
π 2 8265 0 005 0 005

that of the bottom is 639636.4kN/m2. Hence total stress is 639636.4 + 474680.1 =

1114316.534kN/m2

As a result of bending moments on the column, the column would definitely be subjected to

bending stress. The bending stress will be compressive or tensile, depending on the location

and it is given by:

M Di
b t ,……………………………………………………………………….41
Iv 2

where:

M is the total bending moment at the plane being considered

Iv is the second moment of area of the vessel about the plane of bending moment

π
Iv Do 4 Di 4 , …………………………………………………………………….42
64

Do = 2.8265 + (2×0.005) = 2.8365m for the top and 3.4684 for the bottoms.

Iv = 0.0446m for the top and 0.0816m for the bottoms

b 44308592.54N/m2 for the top and 34291923.5 N/m2 for bottoms

The resultant longitudinal stress, z w L αb ……………………...…..................43

For compressive stress, w negative

Therefore, z upwind 3108434536 N m2

234
z downwind 2072721518N m2

As there is no torsional shear stress, the principal stresses will be z and k. The greatest

difference between the principal stresses will be on the down-wind side and this should be

below the maximum allowable of 141.92 N/mm2.

Therefore the metal can withstand the stresses imposed on it during operation since the

stresses are well below the maximum allowable stress.

12.5.2 Column support

The method used to support a vessel will depend on the size, shape and weight of the

vessel, the design temperature and pressure, the vessel location and arrangement and the

internal and external fittings and attachments.

12.5.3 Choice of support

The most suitable support for the column is the skirt support since the bending moment is

significant.

12.5 .4 Skirt support design

The height of the skirt is usually between 2-3 m. For this design a height of 2.5 m is used.

The skirt thickness must be sufficient enough to withstand the dead weight loads and

bending moments imposed on it by the column.

Thus, the resultant stresses, in the skirt will be:

s bs ws ………………………………………………………….………………..44

Where:

bs = the bending stress in the skirt given by;


235
4Ms
bs ………………………………………………………………………….45
π Ds ts ts Ds

Where,

bs = bending stress,

Ms = bending moment at the base

Ds = inside diameter of skirt (assumed to be that of column = 3.4584m)

ts = skirt thickness: as first trial, take skirt thickness to be 15 mm.[1],

Approximate weight π
4
1 52 28 1081 736 9 81 525074 2508 N

Therefore the total weight 525074 2508 481038 2 1006112 451 N

wx2
Bending moment at base of skirt .................................................................................46
2

Where, w = wind loading = 2131 2 N/m

x = distance measured from the free end = height of cylinder + height of skirt below apex

of cone (try 1.5 m) = 28 + 1.5 = 29.5 m.

2131 2 29 52
Therfore the bending moment 927338 4 Nm
2

4Ms 4 927338 4 103


bs 34 64 N mm2
π Ds ts ts Ds π 1500 15 15 1500

Also

W
ws ...................................................................................................... 47
π Ds ts ts

Where, ws dead weight stress in skirt.

236
W = Total weight of contents in column =90.420 kN

Ds = inside diameter of skirt = 3.4584m,

ts = skirt thickness, 15 mm.

1006112 451
ws 14 09 N mm2
π 1500 15 15

Maximum compressive stress = bs ws 34 64 14 09 48 73 N mm2

Maximum tensile stress = bs ws 34 64 14 09 20 55 N mm2

12.5.5 Criteria test for design


t
Maximum allowable compressive stress = 0 125E Ds sinθ ...................................................48
s

Where, Ds = inside diameter of skirt =3.4584m

ts = skirt thickness, 15 mm

θ = base angle of conical skirt = 90o

E = Young modulus of skirt material = 190000 N/m2

0 015
maximum 0 125 190000 sin90 103 01N m2
3 4584

This is far higher than the calculated design stress. The criterion is therefore satisfied.

Maximum tensile stress = fsJsinθ [1].

Where fs = maximum allowable design stress for skirt material = 103.01 N m2

J = weld joint factor = 0.85 [1]

237
θ = base angle of skirt = 90o

maximum tensile strength 103 01 0 85 sin90 87 559N m2

Both criteria are satisfied. Thus the design is satisfactory.

2mm is added to the skirt thickness to cater for possible corrosion. Design skirt thickness is

therefore taken as 17 mm.

12.5.6 Base ring and anchor bolt

The loads carried by the skirt are transmitted to the foundation slab by the skirt base ring.

The moments produced by wind and other lateral loads will tend to overturn the column;

however this will be opposed by the couple set up by the weight of the column and the

tensile load in the anchor bolts.

The anchor bolts are assumed to share the overturning load equally, and the bolt area

required is given by:

1 4Ms
Ab W ……………………………………………………….. ……………49
Nb fb Db

Where:

Ab = area of one bolt at the root of the thread

Nb = number of bolts

fb = maximum allowable bolt stress = 125 N/m2

Ms = bending moment at the base = 1613551 469 Nm

Db = bolt circle diameter = 2.2 m

238
W = weight of column =90.420 kN

Bolt spacing should not be less than 600 mm and the total number of bolts should be in

multiples of 4.[1]

2200π
Number of bolts required at minimum bolt spacing 11 519
600

Closest multiple of 4 = 12 bolts

1 4 1613551 469
Ab 9042 1895 54m2
12 125 22

4 453 3
Bolt root diameter = 49 127mm
π

π 2 2 103
Bolt spacing = 575 95 576 mm
12

The total compressive load, Fb on the base ring per unit length is given by:

4 1613551 469 90420


Fb 2 973363 35 N m
π 15 15

The minimum width of the base ring, Lb is given by:

Fb 1 1195507 822
Lb 194 673m
fc 103 5 103

12.5.7 Actual width

LR Lf ts 50 mm

100 15 50 165 mm

Actual pressure on the concrete foundation,

239
Fb 1195507 822
fc 3 7 25 N mm2
LR 165 10

The minimum thickness of base ring is found by the ring as a cantilever beam and it is

given by:

3fc
tb Lr ……………………………………………………………………………….50
fr

3 7 25
tb 150 59 mm
140

Table 12.5 Mechanical Engineering Design Specification


240
Weight of Resultant 3108434536N/
shell, Wv longitudinal m2
stress
(upwind),
z

Design -45ºC(top) Resultant 2072721518N/


temperatur longitudinal m2
e 85ºC(botto stress
m) (downwind),
z

Weight of 12.241kN Circumferenti 1037008.5kN/m


2
plates al stress

Skirt 2.5m Direct stress 1114316.53kN


height

Number of 12 Load per unit 8249.473Nm


bolts length of the
column, Fw

Wind 1280Pa Total weight 55.841283MN


pressure column

Bolt area 1895.54mm Bolt spacing 576mm

Total 125N/m2 Minimum 194.673m


compressiv width of base
e load, Fb ring, Lb

Bolt 49.127mm Actual 3000kPa


diameter pressure,

Minimum 59mm Design 3300kPa


thickness pressure
of base
ring, tb

241
CHAPTER 13

13.0 DESIGN OF C2 SPLITTER

13.1 PROBLEM STATEMENT

To design C2- splitter which will separate ethylene, acetylene and other hydrocarbon

exiting the de-ethanizer.

13.2 CHEMICAL ENGINEERING CALCULATIONS

SETUP

By aid of a diagram, a distillation column can be illustrated as shown below:

D=500.0665Kmol/hr

x(C2H6) =0.3970

x(CH4)=0.0008 x(C2H4) =0.994

x(C2H2)=0.0035 x(C2H2)=0.006

x(C2H4)=0.5987 T=262.3K

P=3200kPa

F=832.3662Kmol/h

T=238.05K B=332.24407kmol/hr

P=3080027kPa x(C2H6)=0.9942

x(C2H4)=0.0038

x(CH4)=0.002

T=265.099K

P=2000kPa

Figure 13.1 flow compositions entering and exiting the column.

242
Relative volatility(α)

To determine the relative volatility between the two substances,a formula is employed from

(R.K. Sinott,1986) to determine their vapour pressures.The relative volatility is taken as the

geometric mean of the values at the top column and the bottom temperature.

α=PBo/PAo

where PBo = vapour pressure of the light key

PAo= vapour pressure of the heavy key

Using the formula,

exp⌠C1+(C2/T)+C3x ln(T)+ C4x TC5⌡,……………………………………(1)

PBo (C2H4) = 31.44

PAo (C2H6) =25.28

Therefore , α = 31.262/25.28=1.24

Using the McCabe – Thiele theory,

y= αx/⌠1+(α-1)x⌡…………………………………………………………..(2)

Choosing sample values for x between 0.1 to 1.0(values are used to construct the

equilibrium curve and operating lines)

Table 13.1 sample values for construction of the equilibrium curve

243
X Y X Y

0.1 0.12 0.6 0.65

0.2 0.23 0.7 0.74

0.3 0.36 0.8 0.83

0.4 0.45 0.9 0.91

0.5 0.56 1.0 1.00

Figure 3 shows the Equilibrium curve relation between Ethylene and Ethane

244
For the McCabe – Thiele theory, only one component is being considered (predominantly

the lighter component) throughout the entire section.

By the aid of figure 1 above,

For ethylene compositionXD in top stream,

=0.994 ᴝ 1.00

For ethylene composition,XB in bottom stream,

=0.0038 ᴝ0.004

For the construction of the equilibrium curve, the compositions are :

XF=0.6 XB=0.003 XD=1.00

For construction of the q – line,

q=(HV –HF)/ λ……………………………………………………………………….(3)

where :

CP=heat capacity

HV=enthalpy of vapour flow

HF=enthalpy of feed

λ=latent heat of vapourisation of ethylene

HV=mvCpT but m=Mn=28x1.0=28kg(M(ethylene)=28)

Hv=28x0.994x87.461x262.3=638494.47

245
HF= mFCpT Cp=82.04

HF= 28x0.5987x82.04x238.05=327386.771

q=(638494.47-327386.771)/2182578.473=0.15 ᴝ0.2

For minimum reflux(Rm)

Rm/Rm+1=(XD-yI)/(XD-xI)

= 1-0.92/1-0.9

0.8=Rm-0.8Rm

0.80=0.2Rm

Rm=0.8/0.2=4.0

13.2.1Actual number of Reflux(Ractual)

Ractual=1.5Rm

=1.5x4

=6.00

Reflux ratio,RR

R=L/D and RR=Ractual

L(liquid flow rate)=?

D(distillate flow rate)=500.0665Kmol/hr

R=6.00

246
L=RxD=6x500.0665=3000.399Kmol/hr

Also,V=L+D , where V –vapour flow rate

V=3000.399+500.0665

=3500.4655Kmol/hr

For Rectification section,

Calculate for :

XD/(R+1)=1/(6+1)=0.14

Minimum number of plates or stages,Nm

From the Fenske equation,

Nm=log⌠(dL/1-dL)X(1-bL/bL)⌡/logαL,H………………………………….(4)

=⌠(0.99/1-0.99)x(1-0.003/0.003)⌡/log1.24

=4.417/0.093

=48.35 stages

Theoritical number of stages,N

Using Gilliland correlation,

R-Rm/(R+1)=6-4/6+1=0.286

247
From correlation,

N-Nm/N+1=0.35

N-Nm=0.35N+0.35 but Nm=48.35

N-48.35=0.35N+0.35

0.65N=48.7

N=74.92 stages

Feed stage location

By the feed stage location is given by;


0.206
N R  0.5987  0.0038  332.244 
2

    
N S  0.3970  0.0001  500.06 

Where;

NR = number of stages above the feed, including any partial condenser,

NS = number of stages below the feed, including the reboiler,

B = molar flow bottom product,

D = molar flow top (distillate) product,

XF, HK =concentration of the heavy key in the feed,

XF, LK = concentration of the light key in the feed,

XD, HK = concentration of the heavy key in the top product,

248
XB, LK = concentration of the light key in the bottom product.
0.206
N R  0.5987  0.0038  332.244 
2

    
N S  0.3970  0.0001  500.06 

= 4.47 .................................................................................................................................5

................................................................................................................................6

Solving equation A and B simultaneously,

NR = 63 and NS = 14

Therefore the number of plates below the feed is 14. Hence the feed plate is at the 13th

plate from the top.

Tray Spacing

Chosen as 0.5m using theory from Handbook of Chemical engineering calculations

13.2.2 Height Of Tower,H

H=(N-1)TsKd

Where:

N= number of trays

Ts=tray spacing(0.5m taken from Sinnot,2003)

Kd=safety factor(1.3 taken from Sinnot,2003)

249
H=(75-1)x0.5x1.3

=48.1m

13.2.4 Column Diameter,Dc

Chosen as 3.7m using F-factor method,

From correlation,Fc= 1.58Ib/(ft)(s2)

FREE AREA FOR VAPOUR FLOW

AF=W/(Fcρv1/2)………………………………………………………………..(7)

Where :

AF=Free area (Ft2)

W=vapour mass flow rate(Ib/s)

Fc=F-factor(Ib/(ft)(s2))

ρv=vapour density(Ib/ft3)

For W

Molar flow rate of ethylene

=498.378Kmol/hr=(30.754/3600)Ibmol/s

But n=m/M,M(ethylene)=28

m=nxM=498.378x28

m=13954.58kg/hr

250
by conversion,W=8.542Ib/s

From theory, ρv=2.085kg/m3.By conversion,ρv=1.402Ib/ft3

AF=(8.542Ib/s)/1.58x(1.402)1/2

=4.56ft2

FLOODING VELOCITY(at the top and bottom columns)

Flooding velocity can be estimated from the correlation given by Fair(1961)

Uf=K1(ρL- ρv)0.5/ ρv0.5 ………………………………………………………..(8)

where :

Uf=flooding vapour velocity in m/s or maximum permissible velocity based on bibbling of

active area

K1=empirical constant

ρv=vapour density

ρL=liquid density

From fig.11.27(R.K. Sinnot,1986)

Using a plate spacing of 0.5m(18in) and the flow factor,FLV from figure 11.27(Coulson and

Richardson.Vol. 6)

FLV=Lw/VW√ ρv/ ρL where

LW=liquid mass flow rate ,kg/s=332.24407kmol/hr=2.58kg/s

Vw=vapour mass flow rate ,kg/s=501.0665kmol/hr=3.89kg/s


251
ρv=density of vapour(ethylene)

ρL=density of liquid(ethane)=

13.2.5 Vapour density at top

Mv(ethylene)=0.994(28)+0.006(26)=27.98g/mol

Assume ideal gas law is applicable to vapour

Then PV=nRT=m/MvRT

ρvMv=(m/V)RT

ρv=PMv/RT

=101.325x27.98/8.314x262.3

=1.300kg/m3

ρL=0.994(497.1149)+0.006(2.9516)

=494.14kg/m3

Vapour density at bottom

MV=0.0038(28)+0.9942(30)+0.002(16)

=29.96g/mol

Assuming the ideal gas law is applicable

Then ρv=PMv/RT=101.325x29.96/8.314x265.099

=1.377kg/m3

252
Liquid density, ρL=0.994(330.3145)+0.002(0.6658)+0.0038(1.26377)

=328.338kg/m3

DETERMINATION OF LIQUID-VAPOUR FLOW FACTOR,FLV AT THE BOTTOM

AND TOP COLUMNS

The liquid-vapour flow factor FLV given by R.K. Sinnot

FLV=Lw/VW√ ρv/ ρL where

LW=liquid mass flow rate ,kg/s

Vw=vapour mass flow rate ,kg/s

FLV,bottom=0.7√1.37/328.33=0.04

FLV,top=0.7√1.3/494.14=0.035

Therefore the liquid-vapour factor at the bottom and top columns are 0.04 and 0.035

respectively.

DETERMINATION OF FLOODING VELOCITY AT THE TOP AND BOTTOM

COLUMNS

The flooding velocity can be estimated from the correlation given by (Fair 1961)

Uf=K1(ρL-ρv)0.5/ ρv0.5…………………………………………………………………(9)

Where Uf=flooding vapour velocity in m/s or maximum permissible velocity based on

bubbling of active area

K1=empirical constant

253
ρv=vapour density

ρL=liquid density

From figure 11.27(Sinnot 2003) using a plate spacing of 0.5m(18in) and the flow factors at

the top,

K1=0.06…………….bottom

K1=0.08……………top

Correlations for surface tensions ( =0.02N/m multiply K1 by( /0.02)0.23)

Bottom surface tension=128x10-3N/m

Top surface tension=171.28x10-3N/m

Therefore

Bottom K1=(128/20)0.2x10x10-2=0.14

Top K1=(171/20)0.2x9x10-2=0.13

Hence

Bottom,Uf=0.14√(328.33-1.37)/1.37

=2.16m/s

Top Uf=0.13√(494.14-1.3)/1.3

=2.53m/s

The flooding condition fixes the upper limit of the vapour velocity.A high vapour velocity

is needed for high plate efficiencies, and the velocity will normally be between 70 to 90%
254
of that which will cause flooding.For design, a value of 80 to 85% should be used(R.K.

Sinnot,1986).Hence design for 80% flooding at maximum flow rate(Uf) will be as follows:

Bottom Uf=2.16x0.80

=1.728m/s

Top Uf=2.53x0.80=2.024m/s

Maximum volumetric flow rate

The maximum volumetric flow rate can be calculated from the correlation,

V
ύ  ………………………………………………………………………..(10)
V

Where V = vapour rate, kg/s

V = vapour density

ύ = maximum volumetric vapour flow rate

Base ύ =3.89/1.37=2.84m3/s

Top ύ =2.58/1.3=1.98m3/s

Area required

The net area required can be estimated from the equation:

AC  ύ/ ủf ……….…………………………………………………………..(11)

Where:

AC = column area
255
ύ = maximum volumetric flow rate

ủf = maximum flooding flow rate

Bottom Ac=2.84/1.728=1.64m2

Top Ac=1.98/2.024=0.98m2

Determination of column diameter, dc

Column diameter:

DC 
 4  AC  ……………………………………………………………….. (12)

Where:

AC = column area

Top Dc=((4x0.98)/3.142)0.5=1.117m

Bottom Dc=((4x1.64)/3.142)0.5=1.44m

Liquid flow pattern

Maximum volumetric liquid rate,

LB
ύL = ………………………………………………………………………..(13)
L

Where:

LB = liquid rate at the bottom of the column, kg/s

 L = liquid density
256
ύL = 2.58/328.338=7.86x10-3m3/s

From Fig. 11.28 (R.K. Sinnot, 2003) the flow pattern is chosen to be cross flow (single

pass) based on the value of ύL.

13.3 Condenser Heat Duty

Using the Underwood equation

QCOND = V (HV − HL)

where QCOND = heat rejected in the condenser

V = vapor flowrate at the top of the column

HV,HL = molar enthalpy of the vapor and liquid at

the top of the column

But HV=mCPdT= 500.06X28X87.46 X262.3=321209152.5

HL=mCPdT= 332.244X28X111.4X265.1=274732537.00

QCOND=500.06(321209152.5-274732537.00) = 2.32x1010

QR =L(HL- HV)

Where QR= Heat given out by the reboiler

L = Liquid flow rate at the bottom of the column

HL, HV = Molar enthalpy of the liquid and the vapour at the bottom of the column

But HL=mCPdT =332.244X28X111.4X265.1=274732537.00

257
HV=mCPdT = 500.06X28X87.46 X262.3=321209152.5

QR =332.24(274732537.00-321209152.5) = -1.5x1010

Table 13.2: Column Design Specifications

QFeed Temperature (0C) -34.95

Feed Pressure (kPa) 3080027

Top Pressure (kPa) 3200

Bottom Pressure (kPa) 2000

Reflux Ratio(R) 6.00

Minimum Reflux Ratio(Rmin) 4.00

R/Rmin 1.5

Feed Stage 13

Minimum number of trays(Nmin) 48.35

Number of Actual Trays 75.0

Tray Efficiency 78%

Height of column(m) 48.1

Condenser Heat Duty, QC, (MJ/h) 2.34x104

Reboiler Heat Duty, QR, (MJ/h) -1.5x104

Column diameter, m Top 1.117

Bottom 1.44

258
Choice of column tray

The sieve tray is chosen for the purpose of this design because of its efficiency, wide

operating range, and ease of maintenance and cost factors. The sieve tray is the simplest

type of cross-flow plate.

Weir height

It is an important factor which determines the volume of the liquid on the plate and is an

important factor in determining the plate efficiency. A high weir will increase the plate

efficiency but at the expense of a higher plate pressure drop. For columns operating above

atmospheric pressure, the weir heights will normally be between 40-90mm; 40-50mm is

recommended, (R.K. Sinnot, 1986).

Since the column is operated above 1 atmosphere, weir height, hw, of 50mm is used.

Tray area

The weir height fixes the area of the down comer (Ad).

 Ad  0.12  0.50  0.06m2 , at 12 per cent

Net area, An= Ac – Ad = 0.98- 0.06 = 0.92m2

Ad
Using 100  12 , Ad/ Ac x 100 = 6.12
AC

lw
equivalent  0.76 is read from Fig.11.31 (R.K. Sinnot, 1986).
DC

Where lw = length of weir

259
Dc = column diameter

For top column

lw = 0.76 x 1.117 = 0.848m

For bottom column

lw= 0.76x1.44=1.09m

Value of hole diameter, d h and plate thickness are 5mm and 5mm respectively.

Active area, Aa= Ac -2Ad = 0.98 – 2(0.06) = 0.86m2

Hole area, Ah = 0.1Aa= 0.1x 0.86 = 0.086m2

13.4 Checking weeping

The lower limit of the operating range occurs when liquid leakage through the plate

becomes excessive. This is known as the weep point. The vapour velocity at the weep point

is the operating rate the vapour flow velocity is still and well above the weep point.

 14090.52 
Maximum liquid rate     3.91kg / s
 3600 

Minimum liquid rate, at 70 per cent turn-down  0.7  3.91  2.74kg / s

how=750(Lw/(ρLlw))2/3…………………………………………………………(14)

where:

Lw= liquid flow rate,kg/s

260
lw =weir length

how=weir crest,mm liquid

Maximum how

For top column=750(3.91/(264.615x0.848))2/3=50.4mm liquid

For bottom column=750(3.91/(264.615x1.09))2/3=42.6mm liquid

Also minimum how

For top column= 750(2.74/(264.615x0.848))2/3=39.76mm liquid

For bottom column=750(2.74/(264.615x1.09))2/3=33.64mm liquid

Hence at minimum rate, hw + how

For top column = 50 + 39.76= 89.76mm

For bottom column=50+33.64=83.64mm

From Fig. 11.30, the weep-point correlation Eduljee (1959), K2 = 30.4

Also;

uh=(K2- 0.9(25.4-dh))/ ρv0.5…………………………………………………….(15)

uh= minimum vapour velocity through the holes at weep point

ρv=vapour density

dh= hole diameter,mm

uh=(30.4-0.90(25.4-0.0055))/1.6800.5=5.8m/s

261
Actual minimum vapour rate=minimum vapour rate/Ah

= (0.7 x3.91)/0.086=31.83m/s

This means minimum operating rate will be well above weep point.

Perforated area,Ap

The width of each zone is usually made the same; recommended values are: below 1.5 m

diameter, 75 mm; above, 100 mm.(Coulson and Richardson. Vol.6)

Therefore chosen diameter is 1.4m.

Ap=πd2/4...........................................................................................................(16)

=3.142x(1.42)/4

=1.5m2

Dry Plate Drop

Maximum vapour velocity through holes:

uh=3.91/0.105=37.2m/s

The pressure drop through the dry plate can be estimated using expressions derived for flow

through orifices given as:

2
u  
hd  51  h  V ………………………………………………………………. (17)
 CO   L

Where the orifice coefficient CO is a function of the plate thickness, hole diameter, and the

hole to perforated area ratio.

262
From discharge coefficient (CO) plot, fig 11.34 (R.K Sinnot, 1986), Liebson et al, (1957),

for plate thickness/hole diameter =1 and Ah/Ap  Ah /Aa = 0.06  0.1, CO = 0.84. Hence hd

can be estimated as:

=51(37.2/0.84)2x(0.974/264.61)

=368mmliquid

=0.3mliquid

Residual Head

Methods have been proposed for estimating the residual head as a function of liquid surface

tension, froth density, and froth height. However as this correction term is small the use of

an elaborate method for estimation is not justified and the simple equation proposed by

Hunt et al (1957) can be used. (R.K.Sinnot 1986)

hr=12.5x103/ρL

hr=12.5x103/264.61=47.23mmliquid……………………………………………(18)

Total plate pressure drop, ht

ht  hd   hw  how   hr ……………………………………… ……………….(19)

For top column=368+(50+39.76)+47.23=504.99mmliquid

ht = 9.81x504.99x10-3x58=287.33Pa

For bottom column=368+(50+33.64)+47.23=498.87mmliquid

ht = 9.81x498.87x10-3x58=283.84Pa

263
Downcomer design

Downcomer pressure loss

Assume the height of apron, hap = hw – 10 = 40mm

Then area under apron, Aap = lw x hap

For top column= 0.848 x 0.04 = 0.03m2

For bottom column=1.09x0.04=0.04m2

As these values are less than Ad  0.06m2 , the head loss in the downcomer, hdc can be

estimated using the equation given by Cicalese et at, (1947)

 L 
hdc  166  wd  .................................................................................................(20)
  L Am 
where:
L wd  liquid flow rate in downcomer, kg/s
A m  either the downcomer area Ad or the clearance area under the downcomer A ap :
whichever is the smaller, m 2

hdc= 166(3.91/(264.615x0.06))=40.88mm

Downcomer liquid back-up

In terms of clear liquid the downcomer back-up, hb, is given by:

hb   hw  how   ht  hdc ...................................................................................(21)

For top column hb=(50+39.76) +287.33+40.88

= 417.97mm
264
= 0.42m.

For bottom column hb=(50+33.64) +283.84+40.88

=408.36mm

=0.41m

13.5 Residence time

Downcomer residence time is given by:

Ad hbc  L
tr  .....................................................................................................(22)
Lwd

where:
tr  residence time
h bc  clear liquid back-up

tr=( 0.06x0.4x264.615)/3.91=1.62s

Determination of entrainment

Entrainment must therefore be reduced to a minimum amount such that it will not exceed

0.1 moles liquid per mole of gas. This can be estimated from the correlation given by Fair

(1961), which gives the fractional entrainment  (kg/kg gross flow) as a function of liquid-

vapour factor FLV, with percentage approach to flooding as a parameter.

The percentage flooding is given by:

un actual velocity  based on net area 


Percentage flooding = ………………… (23)
uf

265
Actual percentage flooding for design area

5.59
un   3.63m / s un= 3.91/1.54=2.54m/s
1.54

3.63
Per cent flooding   87, FLV  0.05 =2.54/4.24=60 FLV =0.03
4.24

From Fig. 11.28 (R.K. Sinnot, 2003), fractional entrainment =0.06 which is less than

the upper limit of 0.1, hence satisfactory.

Estimation of perforated area

lw
From Fig. 11.32 (R.K. Sinnot, 2003), at  0.76
DC

C  990

Where C  angle subtended by chord

angle subtended at plate edge by unperforated strip = 180 – 99 = 810

Mean length, unperforated edge strips = (3.7-50X10-3)πX81/180=5.16m

Area of unperforated edge strips = 50x10-3x5.16=0.26m2

Area of calming zones= 2(50x10-3)x(2.81-2x50x10-3)=0.271m2

Total area available for perforation AP=1.48-(0.26+0.271)=0.949m2

Ah/Ap=0.148/0.949=0.16

266
lp
From Fig. 11.33 (R.K. Sinnot, 2003),  2.7, satisfatory, within 2.5 to 4.0
dh

Where:

lp = the hole pitch (distance between the hole centers)

lp=dh x2.7=5x2.7=13.5mm

Calculation of the Number of Holes

Area of one hole = 1.963 x 10-5m

0.0148
Number of holes   753.95  754
1.963  105

Table 13.3: Plate Specifications

Plate I.D. 1.48m Length of weir, lw(top) 0.848m

Length of weir, lw(top) 1.09m

Weir height 0.005m Hole diameter, d h 5mm

Downcomer area, Ad 0.06m2 Plate thickness 5mm

Net area, (An) 1.112m2 Active area, Ac 0.98m2

Hole area, Ah 0.086m2 Hole pitch, lp 13.5mm

Plate spacing 0.5m Active holes 754

Turn-down 70% max. rate Plate pressure drop(top) 287.33Pa

Plate pressure drop(bottom) 283.84Pa

Plate material Mild steel Downcomer material Mild steel

267
13.7 Mechanical design of binary distillation column

Design pressure

Vessels subject to external pressure should be designed to resist the maximum differential

pressure that is likely to occur during operation. From the chemical design analysis, the

design pressure is taken as 10% of the operating pressure.

10
  101.3  10.13kPa
100

hence Design Pressure =10.13 + 101.3 =111.43 kPa

Design temperature

The strength of materials decreases with temperature. The maximum operational

temperature was 104oC. For design purposes, a tolerance of about 20oC is allowed. The

maximum operational temperature could therefore be pegged at 125oC.

Corrosion allowance

For carbon and low alloy steel, a minimum allowance of 2.0mm should be used. (R.K.

Sinnot). Where more corrosion is expected a minimum of 4mm is allowed.

Weight Loads

According to Sinnot, 1993, the approximate weight of the column, Wv is given by:

W v  240Cv Dm  H c  0.8( Dm ) t
……………………………………………………(24)

Where:

W v = Total weight of column or shell; N


268
Cv = a factor to account for the weight of nozzle, manways and plate support ring or

equivalent fittings and it is equal to 1.15 for distillation columns. (R.K sinnot, 1993)

Hc = Column height = 48.1m

g = acceleration due to gravity = 9.81N/m2

t = wall thickness, mm = 5mm

Dm = mean diameter of column = t + diameter of column(top) = 0.005 + 1.117 = 1.122m

= t + diameter of column(bottom)=0.005+1.44=1.445m

Wv(top)=240x1.15x1.122(48.1+(0.8x1.122))x5 = 75.87kN

Wv(bottom)=240x1.15x1.445(48.1+(0.8x1.445))x5=98.22 kN

Weight of plates


  0.6   0.28m2
2
Plate area =
4

The total weight of a plate are found by multiplying the plate area by 1.2kN/m

 weight of plate = 1.2  0.28 = 0.34kN

Therefore for 75 plates;

Total weight of plates = 75x0.34=25.5kN

Weight of insulation

269
Mineral wool is used for the insulation because it is relatively cheap and also widely used

for insulating distillation columns. (Nelson, 1963).

Density of mineral wool = 130kg/m3 (Nelson, 1993)

Thickness of insulation = 75mm (Nelson, 1993)

Approximate volume of insulation = =π x0.6 x48.1x0.075=6.7m3

Weight of insulation =6.7x130x9.81=8.544kN

The weight of insulation is doubled to allow for attachment of fittings and moisture

absorption. (Nelson, 1963)

Therefore weight of insulation together with fittings is taken as 2x8.54=17.08

Sum of Weights = weight of shell + weight of plates + insulation weight

= 44.13 + 25.5 + 17.08

= 86.71kN

Wind loading

Wind pressure for smooth cylindrical columns is estimated from the relation;

Pw = 0.05Uw 2

Pw = wind pressure, N/m2

Uw = wind speed, km/h.

Average Uw = 150km/h (Meteorological Department, KNUST). To allow for tolerance, a

value of 160km/h will be used.

270
 pw  0.05  1602  1280 N / m2

The load per unit length of the column, Fw, is obtained from the wind pressure multiply by

the effective diameter, Deff, (i.e. the outside diameter + an allowance for the thermal

insulation).

Fw = Pw Deff……………………………………………………………………………..(25)

Deff = 2.04 + 2(0.075 + 0.005) = 2.2m

 Fw  1280  2.2  2816 N / m

Since the column would be free standing and mounted on skirt supports it would act as a

cantilever under wind loading.

Now for a uniform loaded cantilever, the bending moment at any plane is given by:

Wx 2
Mx =
2

………………………………………………………………………………(26)

W = load per unit length

x = column height

Mx= (2816x48.12)/2 =3257562.88Nm

Primary stress

PDi
The longitudinal stress is given by:  h  ………………………………………(27)
2t

271
Where:

 h = longitudinal stress, N/mm2

P = Design pressure, N/mm = 111.43kPa = 1.4bar = 0.14N/mm2

Di = internal diameter of column = 2040mm

t = wall thickness = 5mm

0.14  2040
h   28.56 N / mm2
25

The circumference stress is also calculated from the relation:

PDi
L  .............................................................................................( Sinnot , 1993)
4t
2040  0.14
L   14.28 N / mm2
45

The stress due to the weight of the vessel and the attachments are referred to as the direct

stress,  w , is calculated as:


W
w  ....................................................................................( Sinnot , 1993)
 ( Di  t )t
W  total weight of the column
57010
w   1.77 N / mm 2
 (2040  5)  5

As a result of bending moments on the column, the column would definitely be subjected to

bending stress. The bending stress will be compressive or tensile, depending on the location

and it is given by:

272
M  Di 
b     t  ..............................................................................( Sinnot, 1993)
Iv  2 
where:
M = Total bending moment at the plane being considered
I v = The second moment of area of the vessel about the plane of bending and it is given by:

Iv  ( Do4  Di4 )...............................................................................( Sinnot , 1993)
64
Do  2040  (2  5)  2050mm

 Iv  (20504  20404 )  1.68  1010 mm 4
64
275968  103  2040 
hence,  b   10 
 5   16.84 N / mm 2
1.68 10  2 
The total longitudinal stress,  z   L   w   b
According to Sinnot, 1993,  wshould be made negative if the stress is compressive.
 z (upwind)  14.28  1.77  16.84  29.35 N / mm 2
 z (down  wind )  14.28  1.77  16.84  4.33N / mm 2

According to Sinnot, 1993; the greatest difference between the principal stresses will be on

the down-wind side and this should be below the maximum allowable of 115N/mm2.

The greatest difference between principal stresses = 29.35 - (-4.33) = 33.68N/mm2. This far

below the maximum and it is therefore allowable.

Elastic Stability

The critical buckling stress  c is given by:

 t
 c  2 104  2
 N / mm ...................................................................(Sinnot, 1993)
 Do
 5 
  c  2 104    48.78 N / mm
2

 2050 

The maximum compressive stress that would occur when the column is not under pressure

would be equal to the dead weight stress plus the bending stress.(Sinnot, 1993).

273
The maximum compressive stress = 5.95 + 19.17 = 25N/mm2. This is far below the critical

and therefore acceptable.

Column Supports

The method used to support a vessel depends on the size, shape and weight of the vessel;

the design temperature and pressure; the vessel location and arrangement and the internal

and external fittings. Horizontal vessels are usually mounted on two saddle supports whilst

tall vertical vessels like distillation columns are mounted on skirt supports. The supports

must be designed to carry the weight of the vessel and contents, and any superimposed

loads such as wind loads. Supports should also be designed to allow easy access to the

vessel and fittings for inspection and maintenance. The height of the skirt is usually

between 2-3m. For this design a height of 2m is used.

Skirt thickness

The skirt thickness must be sufficient enough to withstand the dead weight loads and

bending moments imposed on it by the vessel.

The resultant stresses, in the skirt will be:

 s   bs   ws ……………………………………………………………………………(28)

Where:  bs = the bending stress in the skirt given by

4M s
 bs  .............................................................................(Sinnot, 1993)
 ( Ds  ts )ts Ds

 ws = the dead weight stress in the skirt given by:

274
W
 ws  ..........................................................................(Sinnot, 1993)
  Ds  ts  ts

Where:

Ms = maximum bending moments evaluated at the base of the base of the skirt

W = total weight of the vessel and its contents

Ds = inside diameter of the skirt at the base

Ts = skirt thickness

The skirt thickness should be such that under worst combination of wind and dead weight

loading the following design criteria should not be exceeded;

 ts 
 ws  0.125E   sin s .....................................................................(Sinnot, 1993)
 Ds 

Where:

E = Young‟s modulus = 200,000N/mm2

s = base angle of the conical skirt, normally 80o-90o

The maximum dead weight load on the skirt that would occur when the column is full of

water. (Sinnot, 1993)

 
Approximate weight =   2.042 14  1000  9.81  448.90kN
4 

275
=(π/4x2.042x48.1)

Weight of column = 57.01kN

Total weight  57.01  448.90  505.91kN

Wind loading = 2.82kN

 (14  2)2 
Bending moment at base of skirt=2.82    360.96kN
 2 

As a first trial, take skirt thickness to be 17mm.

4  360.96 103 103


 bs   6.44 N / mm2
   2040  17  2040 17

505.91103
 ws (test )   4.61N / mm2
   2040  17  17

57.01103
 ws ( operating )   0.51N / mm2
   2040  17  17

The maximum stress (compressive), ðs is calculated as: ðs

  bs   ws (test )  6.44  4.61  11.05N / mm2  11N / mm2

Maximum stress (tensile), ðs =   bs   ws ( operating )  6.44  0.51  6.95N / mm2  7 N / mm2

Criteria test for design

 17 
Maximum allowable stress  0.125  200, 000     sin 90  186.25 N / m
o 2

 2040 

This is far higher than the calculated design stress. The criterion is therefore satisfied.

276
2mm is added to the skirt thickness to cater for corrosion. Design skirt thickness is

therefore taken as 19mm.

Base ring and anchor bolt

The anchor bolts are assumed to share the overturning load equally, and the bolt area

required is given by:

1  4M s 
Ab    W  ........................................................................ Scheiman, 1963 
N b f b  Db 
Where:
A b  area of one bolt at the root of the thread, N/mm 2
N b  number of bolts
f b  maximum allowable bolt stress also equal to the design stress opf 115N/mm 2
M s  bending moments at the base, Nm
D b  bolt circle diameter, m
Mean diameter of column including insulation = 2.04  2  0.006  0.075   2.20m
Circumference of bolt circle  2200

According to Scheiman (1963), bolt spacing should not be less than 600mm and the total

number of bolts should be in multiples of 4.

2200
 Number of bolts required at minimum bolt spacing   12
600

Assume bolt diameter = 3.2m

Number of bolts = 12

  2.2 103
Bolt spacing =  575.96mm  576mm
12

277
1  4  360.96 103 
Ab    57.01103   399.52mm2  400mm2
12 125  2.2 

399.52  4
Bolt root diameter   22.55mm  23mm

The total compressive load, Fb on the base ring per unit length is given by:

 4  360.96 103 57.01103 


Fb     110kN / m
   2.04
2
  2.04 

The minimum width of the base ring, Lb is given by:

Fb 1
Lb   ...................................................................................( Scheiman,1963)
f c 103
110 103
Lb   22mm
5 103

This is the minimum required; actual width  Lr  ts  50mm (Scheiman, 1963)

Where Lr is the distance from the skirt to outer edge of the ring.
Actual width = 76 + 13+50 = 139mm

Actual pressure on the concrete foundation,

Fb
f c'  ...............................................................................................( Scheiman, 1963)
LR
110 103
f c'   0.79 N / mm2
139 103

The minimum thickness of base ring is found by the ring as a cantilever beam and it is

given by:

278
3 f c'
tb  Lr .......................................................................................( Scheiman, 1963)
fr

3  0.79
tb  79  10.28mm  10mm
140

279
Table 13.4: Mechanical Engineering Design Specifications

Weight of shell, Wv 44Kn Resultant 29N/mm2


longitudinal stress
(upwind),  z

Critical buckling 49 N/mm2 Resultant -4 N/mm2


stress,  c longitudinal stress
(downwind),  z

Weight of plates 25.5kN Circumferential 14N/mm2


stress

Skirt height 2m Bending moment at 361kN


skirt base

Number of bolts 12 Load per unit length 2816N/m


of the column, Fw

Weight of column 57kN Bending moment, 3257.56kNm


Mx

Wind pressure,N/m2 1280 Total weight 506kN

Maximum 11N/mm2 Maximum 7N/mm2


stress(compressive), stress(tensile), ðs
ðs

Bolt area 400mm2 Bolt root diameter 23mm

Total compressive 110kN/m Minimum width of 22mm


load, Fb base ring, Lb

Actual width of base 22mm Actual pressure, 0.8N/mm2


ring

Minimum thickness 10mm Total weight of 506kN


of base ring, tb column

280
CHAPTER 14

14.0 DESIGN OF ACETYLENE ABSORBER

14.1 Problem Statement

To design acetylene absorber for the absorption of 80Kg/hr acetylene from a gas phase of

ethylene and acetylene at an average temperature of 210C at 17atm with acetone as an

absorbent which flows counter-currently to the flow of gas.

14.1.1 Scope of design

 Components specification

 Calculation of liquid flow rate

 Calculation of gas flow rate

 Equilibrium relationship between the pollutants and solvent

 Height of packings

 Height of packed tower

 Type of packing

 Diameter calculation

 Support design

14.1.2 CONSTRAINTS

 Flooding limits

 Loading Limits

 Absorption factor

14.20 ASSUMPTIONS

 Assuming negligible absorption of other gases by the acetone.

281
 Once the process is followed by air stripping, the value of X2 will approach zero

 Since we're considering a new design with no serious pressure drop constraint, we'll

choose the more economical random packings.

 Incompressible and steady state fluid

 No dilution of the inlet stock

 No reaction in the column

14.3 Justification

Random packing absorber is chosen over the other types because

 It is cheaper in terms of cost of the type of packings used.

 It is economical as far as this pilot project is concern.

 It is simple to construct.

14.4 ACETYLENE ABSORBER

14.5 PROCESS DESIGN OF AN ACETYLENE ABSORBER

BASIS: 1 HOUR OF OPERATION

INCOMING TEMPERATURE: -100C, 2000KPa

Table 14.1: COMPOSITION OF INCOMING GAS (G):

Component mass flowrate mass fraction Amount in

(kg/hr) kmole/hr

Acetylene 76.7416 0.0059 2.9516

Ethylene 13919.217 0.9941 497.1149

TOTAL 13,995.958 1.0000 500.0665

282
OUTGOING TEMPERATURE: 200C, 17atm

Table14.2: COMPOSITION OF OUTGOING GAS:

Component mass flowrate mass fraction Amount in

(kg/hr) kmole

Acetylene 1.535 1.18 × 0.0059

Ethylene 13900.00 0.999882 496.423

TOTAL 13,901.535 1.0000 496.4345

INCOMING TEMPERATURE: 350C.1atm

Table 14.3: COMPOSITION OF INCOMING LIQUID (L):

Component Mass flowrate (kg/s) mass fraction Amount in kmole/s

Acetone 127.201 1 2.190

Table 14.4: COMPOSITION OF OUTGOING LIQUID (L):17atm

Component Mass flowrate mass fraction Amount in kmole/s

(kg/s)

Acetone 127.20 0.628 2.190

Acetylene 75.2066 0.372 2.8925

Total 202.4076 1 5.0825

OPERATING TEMPERATURE IN THE COLUMN: 210C,17atm

283
acaaaa

Figure 1.0: Schematic Diagram of Countercurrent Packed Bed Operation

14.5.1Material balance for countercurrent-flow absorber

Where:

Gm = total gas molar flow rate (mole/hr)

y = mole fraction of acetylene in gas stream

Lm = total liquid molar flow rate (mole/hr)

x = mole fraction of the acetone in pure liquid

The flow of gas and liquid does not change in the absorber

284
Rearranging the equation

For pure liquid stream, X2=0

At the minimum, liquid rate Y1 and X1 will be in equilibrium. Applying the Henry‟s law.

Henry‟s correlation (Hy) = 0.0082atm.m3/mol at 200C and 17 atm (Ray and Johnson)

Assuming 98% of gas absorption by the liquid, then

285
Gas Flow Rate =

Multiply the slope of the minimum operating line by 1.5 to get the slope of the actual

operating line: (sinott 2005)

14.5.2 ABSORPTION FACTOR (AF)

AF = absorption factor

L2 = molar flow rate of liquid

m = slope of the equilibrium line on a mole fraction basis = Hy

G1 = molar flow rate of gas

= 87%

14.5.3 DIAMETER CALCULATION:

286
Adopting the methodology as given in RICHARDSON AND COULSON, VOLUME 6,

page 587. First we calculate the liquid-vapour flow factor FLV,

From the Plot of entrainment vrs FLV,

K4 at flooding line = 0.64

Thus, the liquid flow rate is given as,

Ls = Kg/s

Density (ρL) = 790Kg/m3

The value for the absorption factor (AF) for most absorption processes is 0.5-0.95 (treybal,

1980)

Adopting the methodology as given in RICHARDSON AND COULSON, VOLUME 6,

Choosing the following packing, as given in RICHARDSON & COULSON, Pg 608

Material = 3‟‟ Pall rings metal

Nominal Size = 76 mm

Bulk Density = 273 Kg/m3

Surface Area = 66 m2/ m3

Packing Factor (Fp) = 52 m-1

Voidage, ϕ = 75

Then,

287
=

= 0.4545 Kg/m2s

Designing for a Pressure Drop of 32 mm acetone per m of packing, we have

K4 = 1.25

Then, Cornell‟s method for determining percentage flooding (sinnot 2005, page 618).

Percentage flooding at selected diameter:

% Flooding = = 71.55%

And,

Then, the cross section area required,

(Sinnott 2005)

Thus diameter calculated is,

Di =

288
Hence the Diameter which is calculated from this approach is m

14.5.4 HEIGHT OF PACKING CALCULATION:

Volumetric Flow rate ( ) of the entering gas is given by;

Gas Velocity at the bottom of the tower is given by,

Mass Flow Rate at the top of the tower is given by,

Volumetric Flow rate at the top of the tower is given by,

Gas Velocity at the top of the tower is given by,

289
0.415 m/s

Then Average Gas Velocity is given as,

And, Average Gas Velocity in the Packing,

Liquid Flow (Lf)

Given that,

Surface Area of Packing (SP) = 66 m2/ m3

Liquid Density =

Then, wetting rate (Kister (1992))

The Methodology adopted for the calculation of Height of the Packing is referred from the

literature by NORMAN W.S (ABSORPTION, DISTILLATION AND COOLING

TOWERS), Pg 214.

The Average Properties of the gas at the temperature are given as follows,

The Density of gas mixture )

Viscosity of gas mixture (µmix) =

0.9941

290
= 1.000445 × 10-5 Pa.s

Diffusivity of the gas (DF) = (sinott 2005)

Schmidt Number (NSC) =

As given in the literature,

The Reynolds number is calculated for the Standard Wetted Wall Column having the

diameter,

dw = 3.2447m

Reynolds Number (Re) =

Cited in the Reference NORMAN W.S (ABSORPTION, DISTILLATION AND

COOLING TOWERS), Pg 212, the co-relation is,

kG× (sinott 2005)

Now,

With (P/PBM) =1(approx), we have,

= 0.5087 lb mole / hr-ft2-atm.

Also given in the table of NORMAN W.S (ABSORPTION, DISTILLATION AND

COOLING TOWERS), Pg 210 & Pg 211

291
Partial Pressure of acetylene in the gas at inlet, P1= 0.0059atm = 597.82Pa

Partial Pressure at the Outlet,

P2 = =203.257 Pa


Mean Driving Force =

Acetylene absorbed =

Area of Packing =

Area of Packing/ft height = 66× =550.96 m

Height of Packing Required =

Therefore the height of the packing required is 9.2677 m

14.5.5 OVERALL HEIGHT OF COLUMN

H tower = 1.40 H pack + 1.02 D + 2.81 ((Ray and Johnson) (1.50)

Htower = 1.40(9.2677) + 1.02( ) + 2.81 = 19.09775 m

292
Summary of Chemical Engineering Design

PARAMETER VALUE

Height of Packings 9.2677m

Column Height 19.0977m

Wetting rate

Choice of packing 3‟‟ Pall rings metal

Packing size 76 mm

Type of installation Random

Absorption factor 87%

Percentage Flooding 71. 55%

Pressure of the Column 1722.525KPa

Diameter of Column m

Average Gas Velocity in the Packing

Cross sectional area

Henry‟s correlation (Hy) 0.0082atm.m3/mol

14.60MECHANICAL DESIGN OF ABSORBER

MATERIAL:

Carbon Steel

Inner Diameter of vessel, Di = m

293
Height of the packing required = 6.604m

Skirt height = 2m

Density of material column (carbon steel) = 7700 Kg/m3

Wind pressure = 90 Kg/m2

Permissible tensile stress (f) = 95N/mm2 for temperature (00C-500C)

Poisson ratio (v) =0.3

Thickness of skirt = 30mm

Young‟s modulus (E) = 207GPa (Sinnott 2005 pg 830)

14.6.1THICKNESS OF SHELL (e):

Thickness of shell (e), (sinnot 2005, pg 830)

Where,

Inner Diameter of vessel, Di = m

Working Pressure (p) = 1.09 x105 N/m2

For design pressure, take as 10 per cent above operating pressure. (Sinnott 2005,pg 835)

Design Pressure, p = 1.10 x 17.23x105 N/m2

= 1.89 N/mm2

Permissible Stress (f) = 95N/mm2

Joint Efficiency (J) = 0.5 (Sinnott 2005, table 9.21)


294
Most design codes and standards specify minimum allowance of 3.0 mm. (sinnott2005, pg

826)

Corrosion allowance(c) = 3mm = 0.003m

Hence, = 11.733mm

For column of diameter 2m-3m, the minimum thickness should be 10mm. (sinnott2005, pg

828)

14.6.2ELLIPSOIDAL HEADS DESIGN OF AN ABSORBER

Most standard ellipsoidal heads are manufactured with a major and minor axis ratio of 2: 1.

For this ratio, the following equation can be used to calculate the minimum thickness

required:

11.756 mm

14.6.3CRITICAL PRESSURE ESTIMATION

21 MPa

295
14.6.4OUT OF ROUNDNESS

Figure 2.0

So outer diameter of shell Do = 3.248 m + 2 x 0.03m = 3.308 m

Ovality (out-of-roundness) of a cylinder is measured by:

For vessels under external pressure this should normally exceed 1.5%. (Sinnot 2005, pg

841)

14.6.5PRIMARY STRESSES ON THE CLOUMN

MPa

296
Figure 3: stresses in cylindrical shell

14.6.6 Stresses in a cylindrical shell under combined loading

1.562 MPa

Total weight = Weight of vessel + Weight of Attachments

297
π π π
W= ρ ρ ρ

= 188 KN

The bending stresses will be compressive or tensile, depending on location, and are

given by:

The forces due to wind load acting on the lower and upper parts of the vessels are

determined as

Plw = k ρ1 h1 Do …………………………. (1)

Puw = k 2 h2 Do …………………………… (2)

Data:

Choosing cylindrical skirt support as the support for the absorber

Skirt support is used to support the absorber column.

Material to be used = Structural steel (ISO 800)

ρ1 = density structured steel = 7700 kg /m3

h1=2m D0=3.308m k=0.7 for cylindrical surface

Pressure due to the lower part of column (skirt)

Plw= 0.7×2×3.308×7700 =35,660 Pa

Pressure due to the upper part of column

298
Puw =0.7×7700×6.60×3.308 = 117,678.792 Pa

Bending moment due to wind at the base of the vessel is determined by:

ρ ρ

Iv the second moment of area of the vessel about the plane of bending

Therefore bending stress,

14.6.7 Torsional shear stresses (τ):

Torsional shear stresses resulting from torque caused by loads offset from the vessel axis.

The torsional shear stress is given by:

14.7 Principal stresses

299
Maximum allowable design stress down-wind side well =

14.7.1 Dynamic wind pressure

Wind velocity (uw) for most engineering design is 160Km/hr.

14.7.2 The loading per unit length of the column

Where the effective column diameter is: This includes the outside diameter plus an

allowance for the thermal insulation and attachments, such as pipes and ladders.

D0=3.308 m

An allowance of 0.4 m is mostly added for expansion (Sinnott 2005, pg 853)

300
14.7.3 Earthquake loading

ae = the acceleration of the vessel due to the earthquake,

g = the acceleration due to gravity,

W = total weight of the vessel.

(ae/g) is called the seismic constant Ce,

For most cylindrical vessels, the seismic constant is 0.08

14.7.4 Elastic stability (buckling):

Critical buckling stress:

71.076

14.7.5 Maximum Compressive Stress between bearing plate and foundation

Inner Diameter of the vessel, Di = 3.245 m

Outer Diameter of the vessel, Do = 3.305 m

301
14.7.6 Anchor Bolt,

Wmin=7.86 x 105 N (assumed)

= 596696.65

1 4Ms
Ab W
Nb fb Db

Where:

Ab = area of one bolt at the root of the thread

Nb = number of bolts

fb = maximum allowable bolt stress

Ms = bending moment at the base

Db = bolt circle diameter

W = weight of column

Bolt spacing should not be less than 600 mm and the total number of bolts should be in

multiples of 4.[Sinnott pg860]

302
00π
Number of bolts required at minimum bolt spacing
600

Closest multiple of 4 = 24 bolts

1 4 1613551 469
Ab 9042 m2
125 22

4
Bolt root diameter = mm
π

π 2 2 103
Bolt spacing = mm

14.8 Pressure exerted on the bolt

Pbolt = (fcmin x A) / N = 31.89 x 105N

303
Summary of Mechanical Engineering Design

PARAMETER VALUE

Type of Support Used cylindrical skirt

Minimum Shell thickness 11.733mm

Critical Pressure 21MPa

Weight of Support 188 KN

Inner Diameter of the vessel 3.248m

Outer Diameter of the vessel 3.308m

Maximum Stress on support

Number of Bolts

Material of Construction Carbon Steel

Elastic stability 71.076

Earthquake loading 15040 N

Torsional shear stress (τ) 0.37MPa

Bending stress ( 2.6 MPa

Ellipsoidal head thickness 11.756 mm

304
CHAPTER 15

15.0 DESIGN OF ETHYLENE COLUMN

15.1 Chemical engineering design of a binary distillation column

Fractional distilling of Acetylene in a mixture with Ethylene using binary distillation

column with ellipsoidal head.

The basis of the design of the distillation column is to produce pure Ethylene of

purity1.0ppm and Acetylene of purity 1.0x10-4 from a feed(F) rate of 13496.41774Kg/Hr.

the mass fraction of Ethylene and Acetylene are 99.99988% and 1.1838 x 10-4%

respectively. The feed entered the column at -10 oC and a pressure of 1atm.

15.1.1 Design of the binary column

Assumptions

 Solution in the column is well mixed and homogeneous

 Vapour leaving is pure Acetylene vapour at temperature of boiling solution and

operating pressure of the distillation column.

 The column is well insulated and adiabatic

 All of the heat transfer takes place in the condenser and reboiler

Stagewise analyse for an Hour operaion

Balances on fig.1

Basis: 13496.41774 kg of feed

Overall balance: F = D + B………………………………………….. (1)

305
Where:

F = feed

D = distillate or top product

B = bottom product.

Component Balance:

FX F  DX D  BX B .......................................................  2 

XD = mass fraction of distillate

XB = mass fraction of bottom product

XF = mass fraction of feed

Substituting values in equation (2):

For acetylene:13494.41774 (1.18381x0-4) = (0.999999)D + (1.01x0-6)B

Solving simultaneously gives B =13894.83353kg and D = 1.584212kg

Number of ideal plates

Assuming constant relative volatility, the number of ideal plates at total reflux can be

estimated by the FENSKE equation:

ln[ xD (1  xB ) / xB (1  xD )]
N min   1 ………………………………………….. (3)
ln 

Where:

Nnim = Minimum number of ideal plates


306
XB = mole fraction of bottom product

XD = mole fraction of distillate

α = PA/ PE (relative volatility of the two component)

PA = Partial pressure of Acetylene

PA =2769.6800KPa

PE =Partial pressure of Ethylene

PE =2250KPa

α =1.23

Average molecular Weight of mixture = MEXE + MAXA

Where ME = molar mass of Ethylene

XE = mass fraction of Ethylene

MA = molar mass of Acetylene

XA= mass fraction of Acetylene

The average molecular Weight of mixture = 28.05(0.9999988) + 26.06 (1.1838×10-6) =

28.0499Kg/kmol

Fraction of distillate (Acetylene), XD = 0.999999

Similarly, mole fraction of acetylene at the bottom, XB = 1.0×10-6

And mole fraction of Acetylene in the feed, XF = 1.1838×10-4

307
ln0.9999991  1.0  10^ 6 / 1.0  10^ 61  0.999999
Therefore Nnim = 1 
ln 1.23

Hence, Nnim = 110

Minimum and optimum reflux ratio

The Underwood‟s first equation is used to determine the minimum reflux ratio. It is given

by:

Rmin =
1
X / X   1  X D  /1  X F …………………………………… (4)
  1 D F

Where:

α is the relative volatility of the two components

Rmin is the minimum reflux ratio

XD and XF are the mole fraction of methanol in the distillate and feed

respectively.

 Rmin =

1
0.99999 / 0.11838  10^6  1.231  0.99999 /1  0.11838  10^6  3662
1.23  1

From studies, the optimum reflux ratio to use for lowest cost per year is between the

minimum Rmin and the total reflux. This has been shown for many cases to be at an

operating reflux ratio between 1.2 Rmin and 1.5 Rmin. (Geankopolis, 198…….)

Therefore, the optimum reflux ratio, R is chosen as

R = 1.2(Rmin) = 4394

308
Actual number of plates, N

From Gilliland‟s correlation given by:


N  N min  R  Rmin 
 f  ......................................................................................(5)
N 1  R 1 

(Coulson et al, 1983)

Where R is the optimum reflux ratio and N is the number of plates.

R  Rm
 1.83
R 1

For plate efficiency, Eo = 85%

N=Nmin/0.85

N=129

Location of feed plate

KIRKBRIDE‟S equation is used for the estimation of the number of plates above and

below the feed plate. The equation is given by:

m  B  X  X FD 
log    0.206 log   FF   …………………………………(6)
 p  D  X MF  X MD 

Where:

B = mass flow rate of bottom product

D = mass flow rate of top product

309
XFF = fraction of Ethylene in feed

XMF = mole fraction of Acetylene in feed XFD = mole fraction of Ethylene in top product

XMD = mole fraction of Acetylene in top product

m = number of theoretical stages above the feed plates

p = number of theoretical stages below the feed plate

m 13494.83  0.99999  1.0  10^ _ 6 


log    0.206 log      0.9998
 p  1.5977  0.11838  10^ 6  0.99999 

m
  0.9998
p

 m = 0.9998p………………………………………………………..…. (7)

Total number of plates, T = p + m……………….................................... (8)

Substituting equation (7) into (8) gives:

T = p + 0.9998p

 129 = 1.9998p

 P= 65

Therefore the number of plates below the feed is 69. Hence the feed plate is at the 11th

plate from the top.

310
15.2 Height of tower, H

For safety considerations,

 0.25m is added to the top tray

 0.5m is taken as the spacing between the draw off tray and the bottom of the

product. (Coulson et al, 1983)

Tray spacing =600mm=24in

H = (129*0.6)+0.75= 78.15m

Vapour and liquid rates at the top of the column

Material balance around the first tray of the column and the condenser gives:

V = L + D………………………………………………………. (9)

Where V and L are vapour and liquid rates at the top of the column

D = Distillate or top product

V
Now  R  1 (Mc Cabe et al, 1986)
D

Where:

R = reflux ratio

V
  4394  1  4395 , but D = 1.5842kg /hr
D

V=6962.6147kg/hr

L R 4394
Also    0.9459 L=6961.0305kg/hr
V R  1 4394  1
311
Therefore vapour and liquid rate at the top of the column are 6962.6147kg/hr and

6961.0305kg/hr respectively.

Vapour and liquid rates at the bottom of the column

Assume a constant molal overflow at the bottom of the column, the total material balance

gives:

LB = VB +B………………………………………………………………… (10)

Where:

LB = liquid rate at the bottom of the column

VB = vapour rate at the bottom of the column

B = bottom product

F= feed rate

But

LB = L + F…………………………………………………………….……. (11)

LB =20457.4482kg/hr

VB=LB-B

VB=6962.6182kg/hr

Therefore liquid and vapour rate at the bottom of the column are 20457.4482kg/hr and

6962.6182kg/hr respectively.

Balances around entire column

312
Steady state energy balance around the entire column:

FhF + QC + QR = DhD + BhB……………………………………………….. (12)

Condenser mass balance is

V=L+D

Condenser energy balance is

V hV + QC = DhD + L hL…………………………………………... ….. (13)

Where:

hV = enthalpy of vapour at the top of column =

V = vapour flow rate = 6962.6147kg/hr

QC = condenser duty

D = flow rate of distillate 1.5842kg/hr

hD = enthalpy of distillate = -2086.74kJ

L = flow rate of liquid at the top of the column =6961.0305kg/hr

hL = enthalpy of liqiud at the top of the column = -2086.74kJ

 QC  32614MJ / hr

From equation (11), QR = DhD + BhB - FhF - QC

Where:

QR = reboiler heat duty

313
hF = the enthalpy of feed = 102.55kJ

hD = enthalpy of distillate = -2086.74kJ

hB = enthalpy of bottom product = 102.55kJ

D = flow rate of distillate 1.5842kg/hr

QC = condenser heat duty = MJ/hr

F = feed flow rate = 13496.4177kg/hr

 QR  29833MJ / hr

Determination of vapour and liquid density at the top

Molecular weight of vapour MV = 0.99999(26.06) + 1.0*10-6(28.05) = 26.06g/mol

Assume the ideal gas law is applicable to vapour,

Then

M
PV = nRT  PV = RT
MV

M 
 PMV =   RT ,  PMV  V RT
V 

PM V
 V 
RT

Where:

T = Boiling point temperature of Acetylene = 357K

314
P = pressure of column = 5030kPa

MV = molecular vapour = 26.06g/mol

R = gas constant =8.314 Pa·m3/mol.K

V  vapour density

V  (5030 x 26.06)/(8.314 x 357) =44.1636kg/ m3

V  0.999999(7.61)+(5.5909)(1.x10-6)=7.61kg/m3

Liquid density = (1.0 x10 -6)(11.03329) +(0.999999 x17.2133)=17.2132kg/ m3

Determination of vapour and liquid density at the bottom

Molecular vapour, MV = 0.999999(28.05) + 1.0 x 10 -6(26.06) = 28.0499g/mol

Assume the ideal gas law is applicable to vapour,

M
then PV = nRT  PV = RT
MV

M 
 PMV =   RT
V 

PM V
 V 
RT

Where:

T = Boiling point temperature of Ethylene= 377K

P = pressure of column = 5030kPa

315
MV = molecular vapour = 28.0499g/mol

R = gas constant =8.314 Pa·m3/mol.K

V  vapour density

V  (5030 x 28. 0499)/(8.314 x 377)=45.0140kg/ m3

Hence the gas mixture is not ideal.

V  0.999999(5.5909) + 7.61(1.0 x 10 -6) =5.59kg/ m3

Liquid density, = 11.0339kg/ m3

Determination of liquid-vapour flow factor, FLV at the bottom and top

The liquid-vapour flow factor, FLV is given by:

Lw V
FLV  (R.K Sinnot, 1986)
Vw L

Where:

Lw = liquid mass flow-rate, kg/hr

Vw = vapour mass flow-rate, kg/hr

At bottom;

=2.091

At the top

=0.665

316
Therefore, the liquid-vapour factor at the bottom and top are 2.091 and 0.665 respectively.

Determination of flooding velocity at the top and bottom

The flooding velocity can be estimated from the correlation given by Fair (1961):

K1   L  V 
0.5

uf = ……………………………………………………….. (9)
V 0.5

Where:

uf = is the flooding vapour velocity in m/s or maximum permissible velocity

based on bubbling of active area,

K1 = empirical constant,

V = vapour density

 L = liquid density

From fig. 11.27 (R.K. Sinnot, 1986), using a plate spacing of (24inch)

K1= 0.09…….bottom

K1 = 0.10…….top

Corrections for surface tensions:

Bottom surface tension = 56x10-3N/m

Top surface tension = 21x10-3N/m

Therefore:

317
0.2
 56  2
Bottom K1 =    9 10  0.11
 20 

0.2
 21  2
Top K1 =   10 10  0.10
 20 

Hence,

Bottom

uf=0.11((11.033-5.59)/(5.59)^0.5)

uf b= 13.5398 m/s

Top

uft =11.2352 m/s

The flooding condition fixes the upper limit of the vapour velocity. A high vapour velocity

is needed for high plate efficiencies, and the velocity will normally be between 70 to 90 per

cent of that which will cause flooding. For design, a value of 80 to 85 per cent should be

used. (R.K. Sinnot, 1986)

Hence design for 85 per cent flooding at maximum flow rate (ủf) will be:

Bottom ủfb 13.5398 x 0.8500=11.5088m/s

Top ủft =11.2352 x 0.8500=9.55m/s

Maximum volumetric flow rate

The maximum volumetric flow rate can be calculated from the correlation,

318
V
ύ  ………………………………………………………………………..(10)
V

Where V = vapour rate, kg/s m3

V = vapour density

ύ = maximum volumetric vapour flow rate

Base ύ = (6962.6182/5.59)

=124.55488 m3 / hr

Top ύ = (6961.0305/7.61)

=91.7215 m3 / hr

15.3 Area required

The net area required can be estimated from the equation:

AC  ύ/ ủf ……….…………………………………………………………..(11)

Where:

AC = column area

ύ = maximum volumetric flow rate

ủf = maximum flooding flow rate

Bottom

319
AC  (124.5548/11.5088)=10.8225m2

Top

AC  (91.7215/9.55)

=9.5120m2

15.3.1 Determination of column diameter, dc

Column diameter:

DC 
 4  AC  ……………………………………………………………….. (12)

Where:

AC = column area

Top

=(4 x9,51220/3.124)^0.5

=3.4801m =3.5m

Bottom

=(4 x 10.8225/3.142)^0.5

3.7120m

=3.7m

For the design

320
Dc =3.6m

Liquid flow pattern

Maximum volumetric liquid rate,

LB
ύL = ………………………………………………………………………..(13)
L

Where:

LB = liquid rate at the bottom of the column, kg/s

 L = liquid density

ύL =(20457.4482/11.033)

=1854.2054 m3 /hr

=0.5151m3s-1

15.4 Summary of chemical engineering design

321
Table 15.1: Column Design Specifications

Feed Temperature (0C) -30

Feed Pressure (kPa) 1atm

Top Pressure (kPa) 0.999atm

Bottom Pressure (kPa) 1.001atm

Reflux Ratio(R) 4394

Minimum Reflux Ratio(Rmin) 3662

R/Rmin 1.2

Feed Stage 65

Minimum number of trays(Nmin) 110

Number of Actual Trays 129

Tray Efficiency 85%

Height of column(m) 78.2m

Condenser Heat Duty, QC, (MJ/h) -32614

Reboiler Heat Duty, QR, (MJ/h) 29833

Ethylene purity 99.9999%

Column diameter, m 3.6

322
15.5 Choice of column tray

The sieve tray is chosen for the purpose of this design because of its efficiency, wide

operating range, and ease of maintenance and cost factors. The sieve tray is the simplest

type of cross-flow plate.

Weir height

For columns operating above atmospheric pressure, the weir heights will normally be

between 40-90mm; 40-50mm is recommended, (R.K. Sinnot, 1986).

Since the column is operated at 1 atmosphere, weir height, hw, of 0.050m is used.

Tray area

The weir height fixes the area of the down comer (Ad).

Ad =10.1672 x 0-05=0.5084m2 at 12 per cent

Net area, AN = AC-Ad =10.1672-0.5084

AN =9.6588m2

Ad l
Using 100  12 , equivalent w  0.76 is read from Fig.11.31 (R.K. Sinnot, 1986).
AC DC

Where lw = length of weir

Dc = column diameter

lw =0.76 x 3.6m =2.7720m

Value of hole diameter, d h and plate thickness are 0.05m and 5mm respectively.

323
dh =0.05m

Active area, Aa = AC -2Ad =9.1504m2

Hole area, Ah =0.1Aa

Ah=0.91504m2

Checking weeping

The hole area must be chosen so that at the lowest operating rate the vapour flow velocity is

still and well above the weep point.

Maximum liquid rate ύL = 1854.2054m3/hr

Minimum liquid rate =70% of ύL (minimum liquid rate at 70% turn –down)

=1297.9438m3/hr

=1.3535m3s-1

How =750(LW/  L lw) 2/3

Where;

LW =liquid flow rate, kg/hr

Lw =weir length,m

how =weir crest, mm

Maximum how

LW=1.9336kg/s

324
How =750(1.9336/(17.2132 x 2.772))2/3

=88.48mm

Minimum how = 750(1.3535/17.2132 x 2.772)2/3

=69mm

Hence at minimum rate,hw + how =120mm

From Fig. 11.30, the weep-point correlation Eduljee (1959), K2 = 31.4

Also;

= minimum vapour velocity through the holes at weep point

V = vapour density

dh = hole diameter.mm

=(31.4-0.90(25.4 -0.05)/(5.59) 0.5)

=8.63m/s

minimum vapour rate


Actual minimum vapour velocity = ……………………… (16)
Ah

=18ms-1

This means minimum operating rate will be well above weep point.

325
Dry Plate Drop

Maximum vapour velocity through holes:

=38m/s

The pressure drop through the dry plate can be estimated using expressions derived for flow

through orifices given as:

2
u  
hd  51  h  V ………………………………………………………………. (17)
 CO   L

Where the orifice coefficient CO is a function of the plate thickness, hole diameter, and the

hole to perforated area ratio.

From discharge coefficient (CO) plot, fig 11.34 (R.K Sinnot, 1986), Liebson et al, (1957),

for plate thickness/hole diameter =1 and Ah/Ap  Ah /Aa = 0.1, CO = 0.84. Hence hd can be

estimated as:

2
 37.8  0.74
= 51   69.5mm liquid
 0.84  1100

Residual Head

12.5  103
hr 
L
12.5  103
hr   11.4mm liquid...........................................................................(18)
1100

326
Total plate pressure drop, ht

ht  hd   hw  how   hr ……………………………………… ……………….(19)

= 69.5   50  15  11.4  145.9mm liquid

ht  9.81145.9 103  23  32.92 Pa

Downcomer design

Downcomer pressure loss

Assume the height of apron, hap = hw – 10 = 40mm

Then area under apron, Aap = lw x hap = 1.22 x 0.04 = 0.049m2

As this is less than Ad =0.5084m2 the head loss in the downcomer, hdc can be estimated

using the equation given by Cicalese et at, (1947)

 L 
hdc  166  wd  .................................................................................................(20)
  L Am 
where:
L wd  liquid flow rate in downcomer, kg/s
A m  either the downcomer area Ad or the clearance area under the downcomer A ap :
whichever is the smaller, m 2

 3.91 
hdc  166   12.0mm
1100  0.049 

Downcomer liquid back-up

In terms of clear liquid the downcomer back-up, hb, is given by:

327
hb   hw  how   ht  hdc ...................................................................................(21)

hb   50  15  145.9  12
 222.9mm

= 0.22m

Residence time

Downcomer residence time is given by:

Ad hbc  L
tr  .....................................................................................................(22)
Lwd

where:
tr  residence time
h bc  clear liquid back-up

0.06  0.22 1100


tr   3.7 s
3.91

Determination of entrainment

The percentage flooding is given by:

un actual velocity  based on net area 


Percentage flooding = ………………… (23)
uf

Actual percentage flooding for design area

5.59
un   3.63m / s
1.54

328
3.63
Per cent flooding   87, FLV  0.05
4.24

From Fig. 11.28 (R.K. Sinnot, 1986), fractional entrainment   0.08 which is less than the

upper limit of 0.1, hence satisfactory.

Estimation of perforated area

lw
From Fig. 11.32 (R.K. Sinnot, 1986), at  0.76
DC

C  990

Where C  angle subtended by chord

angle subtended at plate edge by unperforated strip = 180 – 99 = 810

Mean length, unperforated edge strips =  2.04  50 103   


81
 2.81m
180

Area of unperforated edge strips = 50 103  2.81  0.141m2

Area of calming zones 2  50 103   1.22  2  50 103   0.117m2

Total area available for perforation AP  1.48   0.141  0.117   1.222m2

Ah 0.148
  0.121
Ap 1.222

lp
From Fig. 11.33 (R.K. Sinnot, 1986),  2.7, satisfatory, within 2.5 to 4.0
dh

Where:

329
lp = the hole pitch (distance between the hole centers)

l p  d h  2.8  5  2.7  13.5mm

Calculation of the Number of Holes

Area of one hole = 1.963 x 10-3m2

Number of holes =AC/ Area of a hole

=48989

Table 15.2: Plate Specifications

Plate I.D. 3.6m Length of weir, lw 2.772m

Weir height 0.5m Hole diameter, d h 50mm

Downcomer area, Ad 0.5084m2 Plate thickness 5mm

Net area, (An) 9.6588m2 Active area, Ac 10.1672m2

Hole area, Ah 0.00196m2 Hole pitch, lp 13.5mm

Plate spacing 0.6m Active holes 48989

Turn-down 70% max. rate Plate pressure drop 146mm

liquid=32.92Pa

Plate material Mild steel Downcomer material Mild steel

330
15.6 Mechanical design of binary distillation column

15.6.1 Design pressure

Vessels subject to external pressure should be designed to resist the maximum differential

pressure that is likely to occur during operation. From the chemical design analysis, the

design pressure is taken as 10% of the operating pressure.

10
  101.3  10.13kPa
100

hence Design Pressure =10.13 + 101.3 =111.43 kPa

15.6.2 Design temperature

The strength of materials decreases with temperature. The maximum operational

temperature was 45oC. For design purposes, a tolerance of about 20oC is allowed. The

maximum operational temperature could therefore be pegged at 55oC.

15.7 Material for construction

A material suitable for the fabrication must be selected. The material selected must be

compatible with the process conditions. Carbon and alloy steel are generally good for use

as constructional material for pressure vessels. (Sinnot,1993). Stainless steel is therefore

used for the construction.

Corrosion allowance

Corrosion or Scaling in equipments such as this is inevitable. An additional thickness

(corrosion allowance) is therefore added to the constructional material to allow for material

lost by scaling or corrosion. The allowance is based on experience with the material of

construction under previous service conditions similar to that intended for the design.
331
For carbon and low alloy steel, a minimum allowance of 2.0mm should be used. (R.K.

Sinnot). Where more corrosion is expected a minimum of 4mm is allowed.

Design load

The column must be designed to overcome gross plastic deformation and collapse under all

conditions of loading. Two main categories of loads are identified. The major loads

include:

 Design pressure: including any significant static head of liquid.

 Maximum weight of the vessel and content under operating conditions.

 Maximum weight of the vessel and contents under hydraulic test conditions.

 Wind loads

Weight Loads

 The major sources of dead weight are:

 the column itself

 the column fittings : manways, nozzles

 the internal fittings: plates and insulation

 external fittings: ladders

 weight of the in the column

According to Sinnot, 1993, the approximate weight of the column, Wv is given by:

W v  240Cv Dm  H c  0.8( Dm ) t

Where:

W v = Total weight of column or shell; N


332
Cv = a factor to account for the weight of nozzle, manways and plate support ring or

equivalent fittings and it is equal to 1.15 for distillation columns. (R.K sinnot, 1993)

Hc = Column height = 78.2m

g = acceleration due to gravity = 9.81N/m2

t = wall thickness, mm = 5mm

Dm = mean diameter of column = t + diameter of column = 0.005 + 3.6 = 3.605m

WV =240 X 1.15 X 3.605[78.2 +(0.8 X 3.605)] X 5 =403.3847kN

Weight of plates

Plate Area = πd2/4

=10.1788m2

The total weight of a plate are found by multiplying the plate area by 1.2kN/m

Weight of a plate =1.2kN/m x 10.1788m2

=12.2146N

Therefore for 129 plates;

Total weight of plates =129 X 12.2146 =157.56782kN

Weight of insulation

333
Mineral wool is used for the insulation because it is relatively cheap and also widely used

for insulating distillation columns. (Nelson, 1963).

Density of mineral wool = 130kg/m3 (Nelson, 1993)

Thickness of insulation = 75mm (Nelson, 1993)

Approximate volume of insulation =3.142 X 3.6 X 78.2 X 0.075

=66.34m3

Weight of insulation =66.3400 x 130 x 9.81 =84.60364kN

The weight of insulation is doubled to allow for attachment of fittings and moisture

absorption. (Nelson, 1963)

Therefore weight of insulation together with fittings is taken as 2 X 84.6036 =169.2073kN

Sum of Weights = weight of shell + weight of plates + insulation weight

= 403.3847 +157.5682 + 169.2073

= 730.1602kN

Wind loading

Column loading is a very important factor which must be considered since the column

would be sited in an open. Usually, columns are free standing and mounted on skirt

support. The column under these conditions under wind loading acts as a cantilever beam.

Wind pressure for smooth cylindrical columns is estimated from the relation;

Pw = 0.05Uw 2

334
Pw = wind pressure, N/m2

Uw = wind speed, km/h.

Average Uw of Takoradi = 150km/h (Meteorological Department, Takoradi). To allow for

tolerance, a value of 160km/h will be used.

 pw  0.05  1602  1280 N / m2

The load per unit length of the column, Fw, is obtained from the wind pressure multiply by

the effective diameter, Deff, (i.e. the outside diameter + an allowance for the thermal

insulation).

Fw = Pw Deff

Deff = 3.6 + 2(0.075 + 0.005) = 3.76m

FW = PW Deff

1280 x 3.76 = 4812.8N/m

Since the column would be free standing and mounted on skirt supports it would act as a

cantilever under wind loading.

Now for a uniform loaded cantilever, the bending moment at any plane is given by:

Wx 2
Mx =
2

W = load per unit length

x = column height

335
Wx =Fx

Mx =(4812.8 )2 /2 =11581521.92Nm

Wall thickness

To ensure that column is sufficiently rigid to withstand its own weight, a minimum wall

thickness is allowed. For column with diameter between 0.5-2m a minimum thickness of

10mm is required. (R.K. Sinnot, 1993) Since the column diameter is 3.6m, wall thickness

of 10mm is used.

Design stress

It is necessary to decide a value for the maximum allowable stress that can be acceptable in

the material of construction.

It is determined by applying a suitable design stress factor (factor of safety) to the

maximum stress that the material is could be expected to withstand failure under standard

test conditions. The design stress factor allows for any uncertainty in the in the design

methods, the loading, the quality of the materials and the workmanship.

For materials not subject to high temperatures, the design stress is based on the yield stress

(proof stress) or the tensile strength of the material at design temperature.

Primary stress

PDi
The longitudinal stress is given by:  h 
2t

 h = longitudinal stress, N/mm2

336
P = Design pressure, N/mm = 111.43kPa = 1.4bar = 0.14N/mm2

Di = internal diameter of column = 3600mm

t = wall thickness = 5mm

 h = (0.14 x 3600)/(2 x 5) =50.4N/mm

The circumference stress is also calculated from the relation:

…………………………………………… (Sinnot 1993)

=(0.14 x 3600) /(20) =25.2Nmm-2

The stress due to the weight of the vessel and the attachments are referred to as the direct

Stress is calculated as;

…………………………………………(sinnot,1993)

W=Total weight of the column

(t)=residence time

Di =column diameter

As a result of bending moments on the column, the column would definitely be subjected to

bending stress. The bending stress will be compressive or tensile, depending on the location

and it is given by:


337
IV = Seccond moment of area of te vessel obout the plan of bending and is given as

DO =3600 +(2 X 5) =3610mm

IV =9.1991 X 1010

227.2466N/mm2

The total longitudinal stress;

= -12.8924+ 25.2 +227.2466

=239.5542N/mm2

= -12.8924 +25.2000- 227.2466

338
= -214.939N/mm2

According to Sinnot, 1993; the greatest difference between the principal stresses will be on

the down-wind side and this should be below the maximum allowable of 11581N/mm2.

The greatest difference between principal stresses =239.5542-(-214.939)= 454.4932N/mm2.

This far below the maximum and it is therefore allowable.

Elastic Stability

The critical buckling stress  c is given by:

The maximum compressive stress = 5.95 + 19.17 = 25N/mm2. This is far below the critical

and therefore acceptable.

15.8Column Supports

Horizontal vessels are usually mounted on two saddle supports whilst tall vertical vessels

like distillation columns are mounted on skirt supports. The supports must be designed to

carry the weight of the vessel and contents, and any superimposed loads such as wind

loads. Supports should also be designed to allow easy access to the vessel and fittings for

inspection and maintenance. The height of the skirt is usually between 2-3m. For this

design a height of 2m is used.

339
Skirt thickness

The resultant stresses, in the skirt will be:

 s   bs   ws

Where:  bs = the bending stress in the skirt given by

4M s
 bs  .............................................................................(Sinnot, 1993)
 ( Ds  ts )ts Ds

 ws = the dead weight stress in the skirt given by:

W
 ws  ..........................................................................(Sinnot, 1993)
  Ds  ts  ts

Ms = maximum bending moments evaluated at the base of the base of the skirt

W = total weight of the vessel and its contents

Ds = inside diameter of the skirt at the base

Ts = skirt thickness

The skirt thickness should be such that under worst combination of wind and dead weight

loading the following design criteria should not be exceeded;

 ts 
 ws  0.125E   sin s .....................................................................(Sinnot, 1993)
 Ds 

340
E = Young‟s modulus = 200,000N/mm2

s = base angle of the conical skirt, normally 80o-90o

The maximum dead weight load on the skirt that would occur when the column is full of

water. (Sinnot, 1993)

Approximate weight =7808.5544kN

Weight of column = 730.160kN

Total weight =8538.7146kN

Wind loading = 48.128kN

As a first trial, take skirt thickness to be 17mm.

The maximum stress (compressive), ðs is calculated as: ðs

341
=934.4826.N/mm2

Maximum stress (tensile), ðs = 44.2023 +3.7798 =47.9821N/mm2

Criteria test for design

Maximumallowablestress

This is far higher than the calculated design stress. The criterion is therefore satisfied.

2mm is added to the skirt thickness to cater for corrosion. Design skirt thickness is

therefore taken as 19mm.

Base ring and anchor bolt

Where

Ab=Area of the Bolt at the root of the thread,mm2

Nb =number of Bolts

Fb=maximum allowable bolt stress also equal to the design stress of 11581.521N/m

Db =bolt circle diameter,m

Ms =bending moment at the base,Nm


342
The diameter of the column including insulation =3.675ms

Circumference of bolt =3675π

According to Scheim (1963), bolt spacing should not be less than 600mm and the total

number of bolts should be in multiples of 4.

Number of bolt =3675π/600=20

Assume bolt diameter = 32mm

Bolt root diameter

The total compressive load, Fb on the base ring per unit length is given by:

The minimum width of the base ring, Lb is given by:

Lb =79766.569/5x 103 =16mm

343
This is the minimum required; actual width  Lr  ts  50mm (Scheiman, 1963)

Where Lr is the distance from the skirt to outer edge of the ring.
Actual width = 76 + 13+50 = 139mm

Actual pressure on the concrete foundation,

The minimum thickness of base ring is found by the ring as a cantilever beam and it is

given by:

3 f c'
tb  Lr .......................................................................................( Scheiman, 1963)
fr

344
Table 15.3: Mechanical Engineering Design Specifications

Weight of shell, Wv 403.4000kN Resultant longitudinal 240N/mm2


stress (upwind),  z

Critical buckling stress, 28N/mm2 Resultant longitudinal -13 N/mm2


c stress (downwind),  z

Weight of plates 8kN Circumferential stress 23N/mm2

Skirt height 2m Bending moment at skirt 891kN


base

Number of bolts 20 Load per unit length of the 4813N/m


column, Fw

Weight of column 703kN Bending moment, Mx 154780.6kNm

Wind pressure,N/m2 1280 Total weight 731kN

Maximum 934.4826N/mm2 Maximum stress(tensile), 48N/mm2


stress(compressive), ðs ðs

Bolt area 724mm2 Bolt root diameter 30.4mm

Total compressive load, 79766kN/m Minimum width of base 16mm


Fb ring, Lb

Actual width of base ring 22mm Actual pressure, 0.8N/mm2

Minimum thickness of 9mm Total weight of column 731kN


base ring, tb

345
CHAPTER 16

16.0 PLANT LOCATION AND SITING OF THE PLANT

The location of the plant is a very important factor to consider when designing a chemical

industrial plant. It does not only affect the profitability of the project but can give way for

future expansion. The plant should therefore be located where minimum cost of production,

as well as distribution could be obtained. Also, an environmental impact analysis needs to

be performed to determine the expected effect of the plant and its by-products on the

surrounding areas.

16.1 CHOICE OF LOCATION

The yard stick for choosing an appropriate location for the plant was an analysis of

industrial areas in Ghana such as Kumasi, Takoradi and the Tema heavy industrial area,

which was chosen for the following reasons: close to the shore (in case of import and

export), constant power supply in the industrial area, and proximity of some raw materials

(from TOR). However, this site had to be dropped because of lack of available land in the

Tema industrial area for lease by Tema Development Corporation (TDC). [source: TDC

personnel]

After detailed analysis of the various locations appropriate for the siting of the ethylene

plant, cape three points, close to the jubilee oil field, Western Region was chosen.

16.2 FACTORS CONSIDERED FOR SELECTION OF AREA

The following are some of the important considerations when selecting the plant site:

1. Proximity to the raw materials supply.

2. Location, with respect to the marketing area.

346
3. Availability of utilities: water, fuel, power, etc.

4. Availability of labour.

5. Transport facilities.

6. Availability of suitable land.

7. Environmental impact and waste disposal.

8. Local community considerations.

16.2.1 Proximity of Raw Material

The raw material for our ethylene production is ethane gas. There will be proximity of the

raw materials from the off-gases from the oil drilling at the jubilee oil grounds and hence

the decision to site the plant in the western region since it will provide a cheaper means of

transporting the raw materials. Also, in case of import it would be easier to transport to the

plant site via the harbour.

16.2.2 Marketing Area

The major market for the ethylene produced is the foreign market. The export is the

primary focus for production and hence the product would be exported out of the country.

This is one of the reasons why our plant will be situated in the western region closer to the

sea port to facilitate the transport of our product to the foreign market via shipping. The

local market is also targeted and can be served. Our target market is the food industries,

plastics industries, paints, packaging, and for use in welding. Examples of such industries

are Qualiplast, Duraplast, Interplast, Blue Skies Ghana, and Ezzy Paints.

16.2.3 Transport Facilities

The transport of materials and products to and from the plant is a major factor in the plant

location. If practicable, a site should be selected that is close to at least two major forms of
347
transport: road, rail, waterway (canal or river), or a sea port. The town‟s proximity to the

port serves as a good means of easily transporting the raw materials and products by sea.

The western region also has good road networks for transport of materials, products and

equipments to and from the site. Rail transport is also available in the region.

16.2.4 Availability of Suitable land

Sufficient suitable land must be available for the proposed plant and for future expansion.

The land should ideally be leveled, well drained and have suitable load-bearing

characteristics. The western region has a vast array of land and its gentleness in level or

topography becomes an added advantage. There is also good drainage system.

16.2.5 Availability of labour

Labour will be needed for construction of the plant and its operation. There must be an

adequate pool of labour available locally, and labour suitable for training to operate the

plant. Unemployment among the youth in most developing areas in Ghana is high, thus

labour especially unskilled labour will not be a problem in our chosen plant site. Skilled

labour can also be brought in for special purposes.

16.2.6 Availability of utilities

Ethylene plants require large quantities of water for quenching, washing, and for the

production of steam as well as other non-production related purposes such as drinking and

sanitary purposes among others. Power and steam requirements are high, as in most

industrial plants, and fuel is ordinarily required to supply these utilities. In view of this,

power and fuel can be combined as one major factor in the choice of a plant site. Takoradi

has a reliable water supply from the Ghana Water Company and electricity supply from the

348
Electricity Company of Ghana since there exist a power line network connecting Takoradi

to the national hydroelectric source of energy (Akosombo). Thus uninterrupted electricity is

assured.

16.2.7 Environmental Impact and Waste Disposal

Many legal restrictions have been placed on the methods for disposing of waste materials

from the process industries. The disposal of toxic and harmful effluents will be covered by

local regulations, and the appropriate authorities must be consulted during the initial site

survey to determine the standards that must be met. All industrial processes produce waste

products and full consideration must be given to the difficulties and cost of their disposal.

The site selected for a plant should have adequate capacity and facilities for correct waste

disposal. The location of our plant meets all the specifications and conditions afore

mentioned.

Even though the area has minimal restrictions on pollution, it should not be assumed that

this condition will continue to exist. In choosing our plant site, the permissible tolerance

levels for various methods of waste disposal have been considered carefully, and attention

will be given to potential requirements for additional waste-treatment facilities.

16.2.8 Local community consideration

The proposed plant must fit in with and be acceptable to the local community. Full

consideration must be given to the safe location of the plant so that it does not impose a

significant additional risk to the community. The local community must be able to provide

adequate facilities for the plant personnel such as schools, banks, housing, and recreational

and cultural facilities. Our chosen plant location is favoured by this factor.

349
16.1 PLANT LAYOUT

1. Size requirements

50 acres of land including transportation and tanks.

2. Ghanaians with Disabilities Act compliance

All our structures will be built (stairs, ramps, parking lots, etc.) to comply fully with this

act.

350
CHAPTER 17

17.0 SAFETY AND POLLUTION CONTROL

Any organization has a legal and moral obligation to safeguard the health and welfare of its

employees and the general public. Safety is also good business; the good management

practices needed to ensure safe operation will also ensure efficient operation.

All manufacturing processes are to some extent hazardous, but in chemical processes there

are additional, special hazards associated with the chemicals used and the process

conditions. The designer must be aware of these hazards, and ensure, through the

application of sound engineering practice, that the risks are reduced to acceptable levels.

[43]

Plant engineers must ensure the quality of the environment both inside and outside the

facility as well as the safety and health of the employees and the reliability of its systems

and equipment. And they are expected to do all of this in a cost-effective manner.

17.1 PLANT SAFETY

Fire, toxic chemicals, mechanical equipments and electrical faults are the major health and

safety hazards usually encountered in the process industries. To avert these, the following

measures will be taken;

1. All electrical wires are to be insulated with PVC while the use of fuses and earth

leakage breakers would be employed to break off power automatically in times of

overload.

2. Periodic and regular maintenance or checks will be made on mechanical equipment

and electrical installation.


351
3. The use of safety equipment such as gloves and helmets by workers is to be

employed wherever needed in the plant.

4. Where the equipment produces a lot of heat, for example the furnace, adequate

ventilation will be provided to prevent long-term damage to the workers. Also

workers will be adequately clothed to shield them from the heat.

5. Personnel working in the plant will be trained on plant hazards and how to control

and avoid them.

6. Proper working clothes, tools and equipments will be provided and management

will ensure that it becomes a prerequisite before any work is under taken.

7. Fire hydrants, extinguishers and alarms will be provided at vantage points due to the

inflammable nature of materials being handled(lube oil, liquefied propane)

17.1.1 Equipment Safety

Guards or metal cases will be provided for machines with external moving parts. All

underground tanks will be covered. All ladders in the factory will be provided with safety

guards. The pipe will be laid such that it will allow easy access to any part of the plant.

17.1.2 Personnel safety

With the exception of the administrative staff, all the workers will be provided with work

clothing (overall). Operators will be provided with rubber (Wellington) boots and heavily

solid boots for supervisors and those of higher ranks. There will be specific days every

quarter of the year when workers will be lectured on the importance of safety. Also, there

will be an award scheme established for the most safety conscious worker.

352
17.1.3 Product Safety

In order to ensure that, the product is free from impurities, the workers at the storage and

transportation units will be required to observe strict handling practices.

17.1.4 Work Conditions and Welfare

The plant will be well illuminated. Basic amenities like washing and drying rooms will be

provided. A cafeteria will be built for the workers. The workers will also enjoy some

medical services.

17.2 ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDS

The main hazards of concern in the ethylene industry are the storage of the produced gases

and handling operations. The hazards also include emissions of flue gases from the furnace.

This can be curbed by the application of capture collection systems of the gases and any

particulate matter. Acetone is also an extremely flammable liquid and extreme precaution

will be taken to avoid any spillage or leakage.

17.3 POLLUTION PREVENTION AND CONTROL

The effect of all forms of pollutions namely air, water and environmental pollution to man

and his environment cannot be over-emphasized. Thus all possible measures are taken to

minimize if not eliminate any form of pollution. The waste products include spent caustic,

oily waters, and gas emissions. As much as possible, workers should avoid contacts with

these waste products and all workers who come into contact with them should be provided

with suitable protective clothing.

17.3.1 Liquid emissions

353
Spent caustic is derived from scrubbing ethylene gas and typically contains a range of

various components namely NaOH, Na2CO3 and some soluble oil. In addition to soluble

components, insoluble polymers resulting from the condensation of olefins during

scrubbing are present in the liquor. Spent caustic is intensely malodorous, toxic, and highly

alkaline. It contains high chemical oxygen demand (COD), some total organic carbon

(TOC), and high total dissolved solids (TDS). These insoluble polymers have a lower

specific gravity than the spent caustic and can be removed from the spent caustic stream by

gravity separation and decanting from a quiescent tank or separator. (Wet Air Oxidation of

Ethylene Plant Spent Caustic, Ellis et al). A spent caustic oxidation unit, which is a wet air

oxidation (WAO) system, will therefore be built to treat the wastewater by oxidizing a

majority of the COD. This allows the oxidized spent caustic to be further treated by

conventional biological treatment prior to discharge.

17.3.2 Gas emissions

Gaseous and particulate emissions to air that are produced primarily come from the flue

gases from the furnace during the steam cracking of the hydrocarbon feedstock. Typical

gases include carbon dioxide (CO2) and oxygen (O2). The temperature of the furnace is

regulated so that NOx emission is reduced to the barest minimum. Methane (CH4) is burnt

completely to avoid CH4 emission.

17.4 NOISE POLLUTION

Excessive noise is a hazard to health and safety. Long exposure to high noise levels can

cause permanent damage to hearing. At lower levels, noise is a distraction and causes

fatigue. Permanent damage to hearing can be caused at sound levels above about 90 dB

(A), and it is normal practice to provide ear protection in areas where the level is above 80

354
dB(A).(sinnott).Noise from the plant will result from the operations and movement of

equipment such as the quench tower, absorbers, strippers, and the furnace.

17.4.1 NOISE POLLUTION CONTROL

The plant will be sited well away from residential areas to prevent the unavoidable noise

levels generated by some of the process units. Ear plugs will be worn by all employees

operating any of the heavy equipments to prevent the harmful effect of noise on the human

ear. Sound absorbing materials will be used in constructing all plant buildings for

equipments that cause a lot of noise, thus minimizing significantly the noise levels in the

plant.

355
CHAPTER 18

18.0 INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL

In the chemical processing industry, controllers play a crucial role in keeping the plants

running by controlling process variables.

A typical control system consist of

 Sensor

 Transmitter

 controller

The primary objective of any control system in the operation of the plant is to monitor and

stabilize process parameters. The objectives in installing control devices and other

instrument in the plant are;

1. It keeps the process variables within safe operating mode.

2. To ensure that effluents are within acceptable limits as prescribed by environmental

regulations.

3. To attain the production rate and product quality in terms of product specification.

4. To minimize operational cost as much as possible

5. Dangerous situations are detected as they develop and alarms and automatic

shut-down systems are provided.

18.1 INSTRUMENTATION

A central control computerized panel will be located in the plant and it will be responsible

for indication, recording, and regulation of process variable and indication of a signal when

a process variable exceeds its set point.


356
The following process variables will be measured and monitored by the control systems.

1. Temperature

2. Pressure

3. Flow

4. Level

5. Concentration

These variables play vital roles in their respective places and recording continuously will

enable personnel to control them within limit.

18.2 Process Variable Control System

18.2.1 Flow meters

Flow rate is checked by the help of a valve and flow meters. Overflowing is undesirable in

any chemical plant hence the control valve and flow meters are to ensure that the set flow

of material moves from one equipment to another. The flow meters in this case acts as the

measuring device which measures the errors in the flow. Error signal is sent through the

transmitter to a controller. An actuating signal from the controller then causes a variance in

the orifice of the valve. The flow meters will therefore be used to indicate the volume of

liquid pumped from the different units. It will also be used to control their flow rates as is

required in the process. The flow control system will thus operate by closing and operating

valves to check overflowing and emptying of holding vessels.

18.2.2 Temperature control system.

Temperature control is quite essential in process design for some equipment such as the

furnace, heat exchanger, stripper and distillation column temperatures. The reason is that

357
any deviation from the required temperatures will result in the production of undesirable

by-products or products that do not meet specifications.

18.2.3 Pressure Control system

Excessive pressure can lead to explosion and destruction of equipment and it is usually

necessary for equipments handling vapour or gas. The pressure control system will

maintain operating pressures within required limits so that any excessive pressure that

builds up will be relayed to pressure releasing valves to open in order to let out excessive

pressure. This will specifically be employed to check the pressure of the compressor,

different absorbers, stripper, and the various distillation columns in order to obtain good

products.

18.2.4 Level control system

This will be used to monitor the settling tank, flash drum, stripper, vacuum distillation

column and storage tanks to prevent entrainment in the case of columns.

358
CHAPTER 19

19.0 ECONOMIC ANALYSIS

Ideal for every investment, the chemical engineering process must be economically viable.

To access the profitability of a project, an estimate of the required investment and cost of

production must be made. An acceptable plant design must present a process that is capable

of operating under conditions which will yield a profit.

Basis of economic analysis:

Start of construction: January, 2012

Completion of construction: December, 2014

Commencement of processing: January, 2015

Plant operation: 3 shifts per day

Process: continuous

Plant life: 19 years

Plant production rate: 100,000 tons per annum

Working period: 300 days

Production capacity: 333 tonnes per day

Selling price of ethylene: $0.53/Kg

Exchange rate of dollar: GH¢1.5

19.1 Project cost estimation

Once the process plant has designed and approved for construction then the chemical

engineer has to estimate the amount of capital required for the construction, operation of

the plant and sale of products.

359
19.1.1 Fixed capital investment

This is the capital needed to purchase and install the manufacturing facilities and it includes

the design, engineering, construction and supervision, all items of equipments and their

installation, all piping, instrumentation and control systems, buildings and structures, and

site preparation.

19.1.2 Working Capital

This is the additional investment (capital) needed over and above the fixed capital

investment to start the plant, and operate it to the point when income is earned. It includes

start-up, raw materials and supplies carried in stock, finished and semi-finished products,

cash kept on hand for monthly payment of expenses such as salaries and wages, accounts

payable and taxes payable. It is estimated that working capital is approximately 5% of the

fixed capital investment.

19.1.3 Total capital investment

The total capital investment is the sum of the fixed capital investment and the working

capital. Some sources of total capital investment for a process plant are loans (banks, rich

relatives, etc), operating company‟s reserves, bond market (treasury bills), and stock

exchange (for companies listed on the stock exchange. All sources of capital have to be

paid back with interest therefore interest rates must be compared before settling for any

source of funding.

19.2 ESTIMATION OF DIRECT FIXED CAPITAL INVESTMENT

The method usually used to update historical cost data makes use of published cost indices

according to the equation below:

360
Cost index in year A
Cost in year A = Cost in year B x ………….. (Eqn 19.1)
Cost index in year B

The latest Marshall and Swift cost index available is for the year 2010.

Table 19.1 Cost Index

Year 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010

Chemical cost index 1302.3 1373.3 1449.3 1468.6 1457.4

Table 19.2 Cost of equipments

Total Equipment cost

Unit Unit Cost Gross cost

Equipment Quantity Cost($)2007 ($)2010 ($)2010

Cracking furnace 1 4,400,000.000 4,669,453.142 4,669,453.142

Trasfer line

exchanger 1 120,000.000 127,348.722 127,348.722

Storage tank 4 90,000.000 95,511.542 382,046.166

Quench tower 1 130,000.000 137,961.116 137,961.116

Caustic tower 1 160,000.000 169,798.296 169,798.296

Reboiler 4 90,000.000 95,511.542 382,046.166

Condenser 4 84,000.000 89,144.105 356,576.422

Compressor 4 120,000.000 127,348.722 509,394.888

cooler 2 100,000.000 106,123.935 212,247.870

Dryer 1 105,000.000 111,430.132 111,430.132

361
Demethanizer 1 110,000.000 116,736.329 116,736.329

Ethylene column 1 150,000.000 159,185.903 159,185.903

Deethanizer 1 110,000.000 116,736.329 116,736.329

C2- splitter 1 95,000.000 100,817.738 100,817.738

centrifugal pump 3 10,000.000 10,612.394 31,837.181

Asorber 1 90,000.000 95,511.542 95,511.542

Truck 1 70,000.000 74,286.755 74,286.755

Pick up 1 30,000.000 31,837.181 31,837.181

Bus 3 60,000.000 63,674.361 191,023.083

stripper 1 95,000.000 100,817.738 100,817.738

PCE 6,584,990.170

Spear parts (15% 0f PCE) 987,748.525

Total Equipment cost 7,572,738.695

19.2.1 Purchased equipment installation cost

The installation of the equipment includes cost of labour, platforms, insulation,

formulation, construction expenses and other factors directly related to the erection of

purchased equipment such as painting). This component is estimated to be 35% of the

purchased equipment cost.[43]

19.2.2 Instrumentation and control cost

This component is estimated to be 15% of the purchased equipment cost. Instrument cost,

installation-labour cost and expenses of auxiliary equipment and materials constitute the

major portion of the capital investment required for instrumentation.[43]


362
19.2.3 Piping cost

This includes cost for valves, fittings, pipe, support and other items involved in the

complete erection of all piping used directly in the process. It also includes process piping

for raw materials, products, steam, water, and chemicals. The piping cost is estimated to be

45% of purchased equipment cost.[43]

19.2.4 Cost of electrical systems

This includes the cost of the power wiring, lighting, instrument and control wiring,

installation labour, etc. This component is estimated to be 10% of the purchased cost.

19.2.5 Cost of building structures

This involves cost for the erection of all buildings connected with the plant (labour,

materials and supplies), including cost for plumbing, heating, lighting, ventilation, and

similar building services. This component is estimated to be 47% of the purchased

equipment cost.

19.2.6 Cost of site development and improvement

Costs for fencing, roads, side walks, rail road sidings, landscaping and similar items

constitute the portion of the capital investment included in yard improvements. Yard

improvement cost for chemical plant is estimated to be 5% of the purchased equipment

cost.

19.2.7 Service facility and utility cost

This involves the utilities for supplying steam, water, power and fuel in the plant. This also

includes the cost involved in waste disposal, fire protection, and miscellaneous service

363
items such as shop, first aid and cafeteria equipment among others. This component is

estimated to be 30% of the purchased equipment cost.

19.2.8 Cost of land

The plant will be sited in the western region. As a rough average, land cost for industrial

plants amounts to 6% of purchased equipment cost.

19.3 ESTIMATION OF INDIRECT FIXED CAPITAL INVESTMENT

19.3.1 Engineering and supervision cost

This cost consist of the cost for construction design and engineering, drafting, purchasing

accounting, construction and cost engineering, travel, reproductions, communications and

home office expenses including overhead. This component is estimated as 25% of the total

direct costs of the process plant.

19.3.2Construction expenses

This cost component involves the cost for construction or field expenses. It involves

temporal construction and operation, construction tools and rentals, construction payroll,

taxes, insurance and other overheads. This component is estimated as 10% of the total

direct cost.

19.3.3 Contractors’ fee

The contractors‟ fee can be taken as 5% of the total direct cost.

19.3.4 Contingency fees

364
A contingency fee is included in the total capital investment in recognition of the fact that,

experience show that, there will be unexpected events and changes that will inevitably

increase the cost of the project. These events may include strikes, price changes, small

design changes, storms, floods etc. this component is estimated as 10% of the total direct

cost.

Table 19.3 Total capital investment

1 Total Purchased Equipment cost 7,572,738.695

2 Purchased Equipment Installation 0.400

3 Instrumentation and Controls 0.200

4 Piping 0.700

5 Electrical equipment and materials 0.100

6 Utilities 0.500

7 Storages 0.150

8 Buildings (including services) 0.150

9 Site Development 0.050

Total Direct Costs (I) 3.250 24,611,400.759

Indirect fixed capital investment Costs

10 Design and Engineering 0.300

11 Contractors Fee 0.050

12 Contingency 0.100

Total Indirect Costs (I) 1.450 35,686,531.101

Fixed Capital Investment (FCI), D + I 60,297,931.860

Working Capital (WC) 18,089,379.558

365
Total Capital Investment (TCI) 78,387,311.418

19.4 ESTIMATION OF TOTAL PRODUCT COST

This involves the estimation of cost for operating the plant and selling the products. Total

product cost is broken down into two broad categories:

Total product cost = manufacturing cost + general expenses

Manufacturing cost = direct production cost + fixed charges + plant overhead cost

General expenses = administrative expenses + distribution and marketing expenses

The fixed charges are costs that do not vary with production rate. These are mainly

depreciation, taxes, insurance and rent.

Plant overheads consists of medical bills, packaging, payroll overhead, control laboratories,

general plant maintenance, storage facilities, etc.

19.5 ESTIMATION OF TOTAL OPERATING LABOUR COST

Table 19.4 Operating labour cost

Operating Labour cost

Direct labour cost

Staff Number Annual Salary per Total Annual Salary, $

head, $

Plant manager 1 35,000 35,000

Production manager 1 20,000 20,000

366
Chemical Engineer 3 15,000 45,000

Mechanical Engineer 2 15,000 30,000

Supervisors 5 13,500 67,500

Electrical Engineer 2 15,000 30,000

Occupational health and 2 20,000

safety specialists 10,000

Quality Controller 3 10,000 30,000

Chemist 3 13,000 39,000

Chemical equipment 24 9,000 216,000

operators

Total Direct Labour Cost (DLC) 532,500

Indirect Labour Costs (ILC)

Personnel Number Annual Salary/Head, Total Annual Salary,

($) ($)

Managing Director 1 30,000 30,000

Personnel Manager 1 20,000 20,000

Human Resources 2 18,500 37,000

Sales Manager 1 18,000 18,000

Accountant 1 18,000 18,000

Accounts Clerk 1 10,000 10,000

Store Keeper 1 9,000 9,000

Secretary 3 4,000 12,000

Receptionist 1 3,200 3,200

367
Drivers 5 3,000 15,000

Cleaners 3 1,600 4,800

Security men 3 1,600 4,800

Total (ILC) 181,800

Operating Labour (DLC + ILC) 714,300

Social Security contributions(5.5% of total operation labour 39,287

coct)

Operating Labour (DLC + ILC) 753,587

TOTAL LABOUR COST 753,587

19.5.1 Operating labour

Operating labour may be divided into skilled and unskilled labour.

19.5.2 Determination of Raw material

In the chemical industry, one of the major costs in production operation is for the raw

materials involved in the process. The amount of the raw material which must be supplied

per unit of time can be determined from process material balances.

368
Table 19.5 Raw material cost

RAW MATERIAL COST

Raw Annual Quantity kg Unit Cost,$ Annual Cost ($)

Material

Ethane 11,470,625.000 0.864 9,910,620.000

Methane 566,347.860 4.000 2,265,391.440

Acetone 13,646,835.400 1.000 13,646,835.400

NaOH 645,681.220 0.870 561,742.662

Total 26,384,589.502

19.5.3Maintenance and repairs

If a plant is to be kept in efficient operating condition, a considerable amount of expenses is

necessary for maintenance and repairs. Since the annual cost for the plant is high, this

component is estimated as 6% of the fixed capital investment.

19.5.4Operating supplies

This includes the cost of items such as lubricants, test chemicals, charts etc, required to

keep the plant functioning efficiently. It is assumed to be 15% of maintenance and repairs.

19.5.5 Laboratory Charges

This involves cost of laboratory tests for control operation and product quality control. It is

taken as 20% of operating labour.

19.5.6 Patents & Royalties

This is taken to be 4% of total product cost.

369
19.6 DETERMINATION OF FIXED CHARGES

Certain expenses are always present in an industrial plant whether or not the manufacturing

process is in operation. Costs that are invariant with the amount of production are

designated fixed charges. These include cost for depreciation, local property taxes,

insurance and rent. Expenses of this type are a direct function of the fixed capital

investment

19.6.1 Annual depreciation charge

Several methods may be used for determining the rate of depreciation, but for engineering

projects, a straight line method is assumed. In applying this method, a useful life period and

salvage value at the end of the useful plant life is assumed. The difference between the

initial cost and the salvage value divided by the total years of useful life gives the annual

cost due to depreciation (peters et al). From the above, the formula below is deduced

C f  S1
AD 
S

AD = annual depreciation charge = $3,040,327.647

Cf = fixed capital investment

S = plant useful life

S1 = salvage value

The plant life will be 16years (Peters et al) on a foreign land).

Assumption

Salvage value is 10% of the fixed capital investment (peters et al)

370
19.6.2 Insurance

The insurance cost paid on the plant and general site is estimated as 1% of the fixed capital

investment (peters et al).

19.6.3 Local taxes and royalties

Local taxes are estimated as 1% of the fixed capital investment (Peter et al, 1990).

TOTAL PRODUCTION COST

Description Cost, ($)

Manufacturing Costs

Direct Production Costs

Variable costs

1 Raw Materials from flow sheet 26,384,589.52

2 Miscellaneous 10 per cent of Maintenance and Repairs 361,787.591

materials

3 Power and 10% of the total equipment cost 757,273.870

Utilities

Fixed costs

4 Operating from manning estimate 753,586.500

Labour

5 Operating 20% of operating labour. 150,717.300

Supervision

6 Maintenance and 6% of the fixed capital investment 3,617,875.912

Repairs

7 Laboratory 20% of operating labour. 150,717.300

371
Charges

8 Royalties 1% of the fixed capital investment 602,979.319

9 Local Taxes 2% of the fixed capital investment 1,205,958.637

10 Insurance 1% of the fixed capital investment 602,979.319

11 Capital Charges 10%of the fixed capital investment 6,029,793.186

12 Total Plant 50% of the total cost of operating labour, 2,261,089.856

Overhead Costs supervision and maintenance

Total Direct Production Costs (M) 42,879,348.29

General Expenses

12 Administrative 15% of the Total Manufacturing Costs 6,431,902.244

expenses

13 Distribution and 10% of the Total Manufacturing Costs 4,287,934.829

Marketing

14 Research and 5% of the Total Manufacturing Costs 2,143,967.415

Development

Total General Expenses (G) 12,863,804.47

Total Production Cost, M + G 55,743,152.77

Production cost $ /kg of product 0.463

19.6.4 Plant Overheads

These are costs associated with operating the plant such as the general management, plant

security, medical, canteen, general clerical staff and security. This is 30% of the total cost

of operating labour, supervision and maintenance.


372
19.7 GENERAL EXPENSES (INDIRECT PRODUCTION COST)

General expenses comprise of administrative expenses, distribution and marketing

expenses, and research and development expenses.

19.7.1 Administrative expenses (general overheads)

This includes executive salaries, electrical wages, engineering and legal cost, office

maintenance and communication. It is estimated as 20% of operating labour cost (peters et

al).

19.7.2 Distribution and marketing expenses

Expenses associated with selling the products, sales office and salaries of salesmen,

advertising cost, container cost and shipping expenses. It is estimated as 15% of the total

product cost.

19.7.3 Research and development

In order to remain in a competitive industrial position, research and development (R&D) is

essential. This component is estimated as 3% of the total product cost.

19.8 PROFITABILITY ANALYSIS

Before capital is invested in any project, one must estimate its profitability. Besides, a

manufacturing process must earn more than the cost of capital in order to make it attractive.

Profitability analysis attempts to proof the desirability of taking risk and also serves as a

measure of attractiveness of this project in comparison to the other competing projects. It is

also a qualitative measure of profit with respect to the investment required to generate that

profit. The analysis of profitability will be based on the following standards:

373
a. Break-even point (BEP)

b. Turn over Ratio (TOR)

c. Return on Investment (ROI)

d. Discounted Cash Flow Rate of Return (DCFRR)

e. Net Present Value (NPV)

f. Payback Period

19.8.1 Break Even Point (BEP)

Breakeven point is the time of plant life where there is neither net profit nor net loss. It is

the level above which the production rate must exceed in order to make profit. The

breakeven point would vary as the sales and manufacturing cost varies over the years.

Mathematically;

Fixed cost = General expenses + Fixed Charges = $42,879,348.290

Variable cost =$ 27,503,650.96

Total Sales = =$ 62,420,221.360

42,879,348.290
62,420,221.360  27,503,650.96

19.8.2 Turn over ratio

This is a rapid method suitable for order of magnitude estimates. In other words, it could be

the ratio of gross annual sales to the fixed capital investment.

That is,

374
62,420,221.360
 0.796
78,387,311.418

19.8.3 Annual Cash Flow

The average selling price for ethylene is $0.53 per kilogram (VAT exclusive). The aim of

our project is to produce high quality product at a lower cost. The tax rate now is at 15%.

19.8.4 Rate of Return (ROR)

Rate of return which is a ratio of annual profit to investment is a simple index of the

performance of the money invested. It does not consider the time value of money and it

does not account for the fact that profit and cost may vary significantly over the life of the

project. [43]

CNCF
 100%
LP  OI

Where

CNCF is the cumulative net cash flow at the end of project

LP is the life of the project

OI is the original investment

383,808,042.486
 100%  30.60%
16  78,387,311.418

19.8.5 Discounted Cash Flow

The net cash flow in each year of the project is brought to its present worth at the start of

the project by discounting it at some chosen compound interest rate.

375
( NFW )n
The Net Present worth (NPW) of cash flow in year n =
(1  r ) n

Where

(NFW) n is the net future worth in year n

r is the discount rate (interest rate) per cent /100 and

n t
NFW
Total NPW of project =  (1  r )
n 1
n

The discount rate is chosen to reflect the earning power of money. It would be roughly

equivalent to the current interest rate that the money could earn if invested. (Coulson and

Richardson, Volume 6). From the figure 19.2 the discounted rate is 22.12%

19.8.6 Pay-back Time

Payout period is the minimum length of time theoretically necessary to recover the original

capital investment in the form of cash flows to the project based on total income minus all

cost except depreciation. The Figures 19.1a,b below depict that, break even will occur at

the end of the 5.3 rd year.

376
$50.00 A Graph of Cummulative Annual Cash Flow,$

Cummulative cash flow ,$ x 10000000


$40.00

$30.00

$20.00

$10.00

$0.00
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Time, yrs
-$10.00

Figure 19.1 A Graph of Cummulative Annual Cash Flow

377
Discounted cash flow rate of return(DCFRR)
0.450

0.400

0.350

0.300
Interest rate

0.250

0.200

0.150

0.100

0.050

0.000
0.000 0.200 0.400 0.600 0.800 1.000 1.200 1.400 1.600
Ratio: PV/TCI

378
CHAPTER 20

20.0 CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS

20.1 DISCUSSION

The prevailing price of the raw materials needed to operate the plant allows for a one-

year break-even point and is an exciting investment prospect. From the economic

analysis, the rate of return is a profitable 30.6% on the invested value. The issue of

fluctuating market prices of some of the process inputs can however alter the

profitability of this project. Challenges as to the constant profitability can be accurately

overcome by continued vigorous research and extensive market surveillance.

Environmental analysis shows that sodium carbonate sludge is one of the predominant

and problematic wastes produced. This is sent to a wet-air oxidation unit or regeneration

unit for regenerating NaOH from the sludge. Noise, thermal and gaseous pollution are

present but minimal.

The major feedstock being used in this project is ethane. This was chosen after

considering its availability, and high yield and selectivity of ethylene. Its processing is

relatively simple, involving lower capital costs. Also ethane is again produced in large

quantities as a by-product from the process and can be reused as a feedstock. This is of

key importance to the project. This is because failure to get your constant supply

(needed quantity) would cripple the project.

Again, cape three points in the western region was considered to be the area where the

project would take place. After considering factors such as availability of needed raw

materials, cost of labour, roadwork, and tax rate among others, it was prudent to

establish the industry at the said place.

379
20.2 CONCLUSION

From the economic analysis, our ethylene plant is economically viable. The ethylene

plant will have an enormous impact on the Ghanaian economy. Among such positive

impacts are the creation of capital for investors, reduction in unemployment, and

provision of foreign exchange for Ghana.It also does not pose very serious threats to the

environment. The steam pyrolysis process using ethane as feedstock to obtain our

product is also very economical since it does not involve the use of catalysts and other

expensive raw materials. Due to the location of the plant, our raw materials can be

easily acquired or imported. The products of the plant also have an already established

market in the country and in the world at large.

The conclusion drawn is that, the establishment of an emerging ethylene-producing

plant that uses steam pyrolysis process is feasible under the current technological and

economic development of Ghana, and would come with a lot of advantages.

20.3 RECOMMENDATION

From the economics, the plant is feasible, and we recommend that this plant design

should be given a favorable consideration. We also recommend that, the issue of safety

and control should be enforced at all levels and times to ensure the safe and smooth

running of the plant, to protect lives and the environment as a whole. It is again

recommended that the possibility of mixing ethane and propane as feedstock is

considered since propane will be produced as a by-product and can be reused.

380
REFERENCES

1) Albright, L.F., Crynes B.L., and Corcoran W.H. (1983) Pyrolysis: Theory and

Industrial Practice. Academic Press, Inc., New York

2) Ali Abdulhamid A. (2007) Economic analysis of a new gas to ethylene

technology. MSc. Thesis, Texas A&M University Anonymous, (2007) Process

analytics in ethylene production plants, oil and gas industry. Siemens AG

3) Bird, Steward and Lightfoot, (1960) Transport Phenomena, John Wiley and

sons

4) Bennett, C.O. and Myers, J.E. 2nd ed., (1974) Momentum, Heat, and Mass

Transfer, McGraw-Hill, New York.

5) Benitez, J. (2009) Principles and Modern Applications of Mass Transfer

Operations, 2nd ed, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Hoboken, New Jersey. Pg 22

6) Chemical Market Association, Inc. Chemical prices Available on the web at

<http://www.cmaiglobal.com>. [Accessed October 28, 2010].

7) Davis H.G., Keister R.G. The Advanced Cracking Reactor (ACR): A Process for

Cracking Hydrocarbon Liquids at Short residence Times, High Temperatures,

and Law Partial Pressure, Presented at ACS Meeting, Philadelphia, 1975; April

6-11.

8) Distillation and Absorption Towers via Correlations‟, Chemical Engineering, 28

December, pp. 77-82 (1981).

9) Gondolfe, J and Mueller C, “The Definitive Solution: Gasoline Fractionator

Retrofit Techniques” , Presented at the 14th Ethylene Producers Conference,

AIChE 2002 Spring National Meeting, New Orleans, Louisiana, March 10 - 14,

2002

10) Hall K.R. A new gas to liquids (GTL) or gas to ethylene (GTE) technology,

Catalysis Today. 106:243-246(2005).

381
11) <http://www.lsbu.ac.uk/biology/enztech/membrane.html>.. [Accessed October

28, 2010].

12) <http://www.chemicals-technology.com> [Accessed 2010 September 20]

13) <http://www.icis.com/Search/default.aspx?sKeywords=Ethylene&searchType=p

roducts> [Accessed 2010 September 20]

14) <http://www.freepatentsonline.com/5202517.html> [Accessed 2010 October 3]

15) <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ethylene> [accessed 2010 September 9]

16) <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Acetylene> [accessed 2010 November 1]

17) <http://kolmetz.com/Article-039.htm> [Accessed September 18,2010]

Kolmetz.com. Technical Articles Available on the web

18) <http://www.filefactory.com/file/644652C7/n/Applied_Process_Design_for_che

mical_and_petrochemical_plants_volume 3> [accessed 2011 march 5]

19) Hurstel, V., Lepetit, P., and Kaiser, V. (1981) Refrigeration schemes serve olefin

plant needs. P: 107-123, Sep 7. Oil and Gas Journal

20) Jenkins,B. and Mullinge, P. Industrial and process furnaces pg 75-79,338-372

21) J.D. Chase, „Sieve Tray Design‟, Chemical Engineering, 31 July, pp. 105-l 16;

28 August, pp. 139-l 46 (1967).

22) J. Chem. Phys., , 1 March 2003 Calculation of interfacial tension from density of

states, Vol. 118, No. 9

23) Kniel L., Winter O., Stork K. (1978). Ethylene: Keystone to the Petrochemical

Industry, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York,

24) Kirk Othmer, 4th ed. Encyclopedia Of Chemical Technology vol 9 page 442

25) Kister, H. and Schwartz, S. “Shed Decks or Packings for Water Quench

Towers” ,AIChE 2002 Spring National Meeting, March 10, 2002, New Orleans,

Louisiana

382
26) Kulbe B, Hoppe K, Keller J, (1982) “Development and application of column

packing for direct heat transfer”, Chemische Technik, 34 No 2 pp 73-77

27) Lam W. K., Mehra, Y. R., Mullins D. Advanced Ethylene Process. Presented at

AICHE Spring National Meeting. Houton: 1993.

28) Lee S.H. Partial catalytic hydrogenation of acetylene in ethylene production,

Dept. of chemical & bimolecular engineering, National University of Singapore.

29) Lockett, M. J., (1986). Distillation Tray Fundamentals, Cambridge University

Press, New York

30) L. Bertrand and J.B. Jones, (1961). „Controlling Distillation Columns‟,

Chemical Engineering, 20 February, pp. 139-l 44

31) Martin R. (1964). Thermal decomposition of propane. I. Introduction and

experimental study of the pyrolysis of pure propane. J. Chem. Phys. 3: 286-97.

32) McCabe, W.L., Smith, J.C. and Harriott, P. (2009) Unit operations of chemical

engineering, 7th ed. McGraw-Hill Book Company, Singapore. Pg 603

33) Meisong Yan, B.E (May, 2000) Simulation and Optimization of an Ethylene

Plant. Texas Tech University

34) Muya, (2005) Handbook of Petrochemical Processes 2005”. Gulf Publishing

Company, Texas

35) Norman W.S (Absorption, Distillation And Cooling Towers), Pg 214.

36) Perry, P.H. and Green, D. 8th ed (2008).Perry‟s Chemical Engineering

Handbook. McGraw-Hill Book Co., Page 9, section 11.

37) Riggs J.B, (1994) An Introduction to Numerical Methods for Chemical

Engineers, 2nd Ed., Texas Tech University Press, Lubbock, Texas, Sanjeev

Kapur, Refining and Petrochemicals, Volume II. ABB Lumus Global. Houston,

Texas Sherwood, P. W. New advances in ethylene production, part I. Petroleum.

19: May: 161-4. (1956).

383
38) Reid, R. C., J. M. Prausnitz, and B. E. Poling, The Properties of Gases and

Ludwig, E. E., Applied Process Design for Chemical and Petrochemical Plants,

vol. 2, 2nd ed(1992).

39) Shah R.K. and Dusan S, (2003) Fundamentals of Heat Exchanger Design John

Wiley & Sons

40) Sherwood, P. W. Production of ethylene from petroleum sources, Part I. Petrol.

Refiner. 30: September: 220-5. (1951).

41) Shigeyoshi Takaoka. “Ethylene” Stanford Research Institute. Process

Economics Program, report No. 29, 1967: August.

42) Sundaram K.M., and G.F. Froment, (1979) Kinetics of coke deposition in the

thermal cracking of propane. Chemical Engineering Science, Vol. 34, p.635-

644,.

43) Sinnot, R.K. (2003) Coulson and Richardson‟s Chemical Engineering. 3rd d,

Volume 6,. Pages 650-698

44) S.R., Martyn, and D.W.,Johnston,Chemical Engineering Design Project: A Case

Study Approach, Volume 6,Chapter 12, Gordon and Breach Science Publishers,

New York,(1964)

45) Seader, J. D., and E. J. Henley, (1989) Separation Process Principles, Wiley,

New York

46) Treybal, R. E., Mass-Transfer Operations, 3rd ed., McGraw-Hill, New York

47) The Innovation Group. Chemical Profiles Available on the web at

http://www.theinnovation-group.com/ChemProfiles/Ethylene.htm. Accessed

February 18, 2007.

48) Timothy M. Zygula, Karl Kolmetz, Randy Summerfield, “Revising An Ethylene

Feed Saturator for Increased Reliability”, AIChE 2003 Spring National

Meeting, April 1, 2003, New Orleans, Louisiana

384
49) Walas, S. M. (1990). Chemical process equipment selection and design.

Butterworth-Heinemann, Washington Street, Newton, MA. (USA)

50) Waller D. (1983). Ethylene from NGL Feedstocks-Part 2: World ethylene

outlook. Hydrocarbon Process.

51) Wankat, P. C., Equilibrium Staged Separations, Elsevier, New York (1988).

52) W.L. Badger and J.T. Banchero, (1984). Introduction to Chemical Engineering,

McGraw-Hill, New York

385
APPENDIX A

CALCULATIONS FOR MATERIAL BALANCES

Molecular weights

Component Molecular weight

Ethylene 28

Acetylene 26

Water (steam) 18

Methane 16

Hydrogen 1

Ethane 30

Propane 44

From our stated capacity, ethylene to be recovered at the end of the process is 100 000

tonnes/year.

8 1x10 8 kg 1yr 1day


Ethylene to be produced = 100,000TPA = 1 x 10 kg/yr = x x
1yr 300day 24hr

=13888.89kg/hr

Basis: 1hr of operation

Total weight of ethylene produced = 13888.89kg

Assuming 2% of the ethylene is lost during the production and coke was also assume to

be negligible but CO2 formed is assume to be 0.05% of the ethane that reacted

386
2
Ethylene lost during production = x 13888.89 = 277.778kg
100

Total ethylene to be produced = 13888.89 + 277.778 = 14166.667kg/hr =

505.952kgmol/hr

Assuming ethane conversion to be 65% and out of that 80% conversion for ethylene and

0.5% conversion for acetylene.

Ethane supplied = Ethane reacted + Ethane unreacted

Ethane reacted × conversion = ethylene produced

505.952
Therefore Ethane reacted = = 632.4405 kmol/hr
0.8

0 .5
Acetylene produced = × ethane reacted
100

0 .5
Therefore acetylene produced = ×632.4405 = 3.1622 kmol/hr
100

Ethane supplied × 0.65 = ethane reacted

632.4405
Ethane supplied = = 972.985 kmol/hr
0.65

Unreacted Ethane = Ethane supplied – Ethane consumed

= 972.985 – 632.4405 = 340.545 kgmole/hr

Chemical reactions in the furnace

C2H6 C2H4 + H2 ............................... (a)

2C2H6 C3H8 + CH4 ................................ (b)

C3H8 C2H2 + CH4 + H2 ................................ (c)


387
C + 2H2O CO2 + 2H2 …............................ (d)

Nsout = Nsin + λɛ................................................. (e)

Where Ns = flowrate of the species

ɛ = extent of reaction

λ = stoichiometric coefficient

C2H6 out C2H6 in - ɛ1 - 2ɛ2................................. (1)

C2H4 out ɛ1 .......................................................... (2)

H2 out ɛ1 + ɛ3 + ɛ4.............................................. (3)

C3H8 out ɛ2 - ɛ3...................................................... (4)

CH4 out ɛ2 + ɛ3...................................................... (5)

C2H2 out ɛ3........................................................... (6)

CO2 out ɛ4........................................................... (7)

From equation (2), C2H4 out = ɛ1 = 505.952 kgmole/hr

From equation (1), 2ɛ2 = 972.985 – 340.545 – 505.952

ɛ2 = 63.244 kgmole/hr

From equation (6), ɛ3 = C2H2 out = 3.1622 kgmole/hr

ɛ1 = 505.952 kgmole/hr

ɛ2 = 63.244 kgmole/hr

ɛ3 = 3.1622 kgmole/hr

388
Hence:

C2H6 out = 340.545 kgmole/hr

C2H4 out = 505.952 kgmole/hr

H2 out = 509.1142 kgmole/hr

C3H8 out = 60.0818 kgmole/hr

CH4 out = 66.4062 kgmole/hr

C2H2 out = 3.1622 kgmole/hr

CO2 out =0.3162 kgmole/hr

Steam to Ethane (supplied) ratio = 0.3: 1

Steam used = 0.3 x Ethane supplied = 0.3 x 972.985 = 291.8955 kgmole/hr

Total output from furnace = 340.545 + 505.952 + 509.1142 + 60.0818 + 66.4062 +

3.1622 + 291.8955+0.3162 = 1777.4731 kgmole/hr

The mole percentages of the individual components leaving the furnace are as follows:

340.545
C2H6 = x 100% = 19.16%
1777.4731

505.952
C2H4 = x 100% = 28.46%
1777.4731

509.1142
H2 = x 100% = 28.64%
1777.4731

60.0818
C3H8 = x 100% = 3.38%
1777.4731

389
66.4062
CH4 = x 100% = 3.74%
1777.4731

3.1622
C2H2 = x 100% = 0.18%
1777.4731

291.8955
H2O = x 100% = 16.42%
1777.4731

0.3162
CO2 =  100
1777.4731

=0.02 %

390
APPENDIX B

CALCULATIONS FOR ENERGY BALANCE

Reactions in the furnace:

C2H6 C2H4 + H2 ………………….Reaction 1

2C2H6 C3H8 + CH4 …………………..Reaction 2

C3H8 C2H2 + CH4 + H2 ………………...Reaction 3

C + 2H2O CO2 + 2H2 ……………………Reaction 4

Since there are a series of reaction in the furnace the four

391
Reference: CO2, C2H2, C2H4, C3H8, CH4, H2O, C2H6, H2 at 25 oC 1 atm

Nout × 103
Substance Nin × 103 Hin KJ/mol Hin KJ/mol
mol/hr

CO2 - - 3.555 H3

C2H2 - - 3.199 H4

C2H4 - - 505.869 H5

C3H8 - - 60.79 H6

CH4 - - 66.477 H7

392
H2O 291.896 H1 291.265 H8

C2H6 972.985 H2 340.564 H9

H2 - - 509.068 H10

Estimation of the enthalpy of the inlet stream

mol

CAUSTIC TOWER

Reference: CO2, C2H2, C2H4, C3H8, CH4, H2O, C2H6, H2 at 35oC for gas and 25oC for

NaOH solution 1 atm

393
Nout × 103
3
Substance Nin × 10 Hin KJ/mol Hin KJ/mol
mol/hr

CO2 3.1622 - 3.1662 H8

C2H2 3.1622 - 3.1660 H5

C2H4 505.952 - 505.952 H6

C3H8 60.0818 - 60.0818 H3

CH4 66.4064 - 66.4064 H1

H2O 0.29189 - 0.29189 H7

C2H6 340.545 - 340.545 H2

H2 509.1142 - 509.1142 H4

NaOH 3981.535 H9 3987.1098 H10

Estimation of the enthalpy of the inlet and outlet streams

394
∆H= 212827.5891

QUENCH TOWER

A balance around water

Reference: H2O, at 25oC 1 atm

Nout × 103
Substance Nin × 103 Hin KJ/mol Hin KJ/mol
mol/hr

H2O 1492.490 H1 7874.283 H2

Estimation of the enthalpy of the inlet and outlet streams

∆H=323794.543

DEMETHANIZER

Reference: C2H2, C2H4, C3H8, CH4,C2H6, H2 at 25oC 1 atm

Substance Nin × 103 Hin KJ/mol

C2H2 2.9762 H1

C2H4 505.9520 H2

395
C3H8 59.5238 H3

CH4 68.4523 H4

C2H6 330.3569 H5

H2 520.833 H6

Flows Distillate (D) Bottoms (B)

Nout × 103 mol/hr Hout KJ/mol Hout KJ/mol

2.9762 - H11

505.9520 H9 -

59.5238 - H10

68.4523 H8 H14

330.3569 - H13

520.833 H7 -

Estimation of the enthalpy of the inlet and outlet streams

mol

mol

396
,

∆H= -11244.9174

C2 SPLITTER

Reference: C2H2, C2H4, CH4, C2H6, at 35oC, 25oC 1 atm

Substance Nin × 103 Hin KJ/mol

C2H2 2.9516 H1

C2H4 498.3786 H2

CH4 0.6658 H3

C2H6 330.3148 H4

397
Flows Distillate (D) Bottoms (B)

Nout × 103 mol/hr Hout KJ/mol Hout KJ/mol

497.1149 H5 -

2.9516 H6 -

0.6558 - H7

330.3145 - H8

Estimation of the enthalpy of the inlet and outlet

398
∆H=1609.18309

ACETYLENE ABSORBER

A balance around the gas Reference: C2H2, C2H4, 25oC,1 atm

Nout × 103
3
Substance Nin × 10 Hin KJ/mol Hin KJ/mol
mol/hr

C2H2 3.0725 H1 3.1660 H3

C2H4 481.9578 H2 505.952 H4

Estimation of the enthalpy of the inlet and outlet

399
∆H=

400
APPENDIX C

CALCULATIONS ON TANK DIMENSIONS

Tank volume 1

The volume of the tank is determined by the volume of fluid stored

Operation storage volume

Volume of acetylene required for a day‟s operations

Where,

= volume of acetylene required for a day‟s operations

= the mass of acetylene for a day = 1896 kg/day (material balance calculations)

= density of acetylene = 1.091 kg/m3 at 21oC and 1 atm (Perry, 1999)

The total storage volume for at most 7 days of supply cut off

Over fill protection

There should always be a small ullage (the air space between the water surface and the

top of the tank) remaining when the contents gauge registers full. Thus equivalent to 5%

of the total contents of the tank (Mobley, 2001).

Volume of the storage tank

Ullage =

m3 = 3,374,331.513 gal (US)

401
TABLE 18.2. Storage Tanks, Underwriter or API Standard, Selected Sizes (wallas, pg

622)

Internal diameter of acetylene storage tank =

Length of acetylene storage tank = 42.05 in =106.807cm =1.068 m

Thickness of tank = 25mm

Tank volume 2

The volume of the tank is determined by the volume of fluid stored

Operation storage volume

Volume of ethylene required for a day‟s operations

Where,

= volume of ethylene required for a day‟s operations

= the mass of ethylene for a day = 333,333.36 kg/day (material balance calculations)

= density of ethylene = 1.115 kg/m3 at 20oC and 1 atm (Perry, 1999)

The total storage volume for at most 7 days of supply cut off

Over fill protection

There should always be a small ullage (the air space between the water surface and the

top of the tank) remaining when the contents gauge registers full. Thus equivalent to 5%

of the total contents of the tank (Mobley, 2001).

Volume of the storage tank


402
Ullage =

= 4,063,274.222 gal (US)

TABLE 18.2. Storage Tanks, Underwriter or API Standard, Selected Sizes (wallas, pg

622)

Internal diameter of ethylene storage tank =

Length of ethylene storage tank = 43.43in =110.3122cm = 1.103m

Thickness of tank = 25mm

Tank volume 3

The volume of the tank is determined by the volume of fluid stored

Operation storage volume

Volume of propane required for a day‟s operations

Where,

= volume of propane required for a day‟s operations

= the mass of propane for a day = 63254.28 kg/day (material balance calculations)

= density of propane = 1.83 kg/m3 at 94oC and 1.0130bar (Perry, 1999)

The total storage volume for at most 7 days of supply cut off

Over fill protection

403
There should always be a small ullage (the air space between the water surface and the

top of the tank) remaining when the contents gauge registers full. Thus equivalent to 5%

of the total contents of the tank (Mobley, 2001).

Volume of the storage tank

Ullage =

= 3,537,431gal (US)

TABLE 18.2. Storage Tanks, Underwriter or API Standard, Selected Sizes (wallas, pg

622)

Internal diameter of propane storage tank =

Length of propane storage tank = 42.376in =107.64cm = 1.076m

Thickness of tank = 28.18mm

Tank volume 4

The volume of the tank is determined by the volume of fluid stored

Operation storage volume

Volume of ethane required for a day‟s operations

Where,

= volume of ethane required for a day‟s operations

= the mass of ethane for a day = 700,549.20 kg/day (material balance calculations)

= density of ethane = 1.282 kg/m3 at 21oC and 1atm (Perry, 1999)

The total storage volume for at most 7 days of supply cut off
404
Over fill protection

There should always be a small ullage (the air space between the water surface and the

top of the tank) remaining when the contents gauge registers full. Thus equivalent to 5%

of the total contents of the tank (Mobley, 2001).

Volume of the storage tank

Ullage =

= 7,427,160.362gal (US)

TABLE 18.2. Storage Tanks, Underwriter or API Standard, Selected Sizes (wallas, pg

622)

Internal diameter of ethane storage tank =

Length of ethane storage tank = 50.1667 in =127.423cm = 1.274m

Thickness of tank = 25mm

405

You might also like